User'S Manual: Model 3G3Fv-Pdrt1-Sinv1

Cat. No.
I525-E1-02
USER’S MANUAL
DeviceNet (CompoBus/D)
Communications Card
MODEL 3G3FV-PDRT1-SINV1
(For SYSDRIVE 3G3RV, 3G3PV, and 3G3FV Inverters)
H Transportation, Installation, Wiring, and Maintenance Precautions
! WARNING Do not touch the conductive parts such as internal PCBs or terminal blocks while
power is being supplied. Doing so may result in electrical shock.
! WARNING Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover, terminal covers,
bottom cover, Operator, and optional items. Leave them mounted in place while
power is being supplied. Not doing so may result in electrical shock, malfunction, or
damage to the product.
! WARNING Wiring, maintenance, or inspection must be performed by authorized personnel. Not

doing so may result in electrical shock or fire.
! WARNING Wiring, maintenance, or inspection must be performed after turning OFF the power
supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) is OFF, and after
waiting for the time specified on the Inverter front cover. Not doing so may result in
electrical shock.
! WARNING Do not damage, pull on, apply stress to, place heavy objects on, or pinch the cables.
Doing so may result in electrical shock, operation stoppage, or burning.
! WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the Unit. Doing either of these may result in
electrical shock, injury, or damage to the product.
! Caution Do not store, install, or operate the product in the following places. Doing so may
result in electrical shock, fire or damage to the product.
S Locations subject to direct sunlight.

S Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the
specifications.
S Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
S Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
S Locations subject to exposure to combustibles.
S Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
S Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
S Locations subject to shock or vibration.
! Caution Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product. Doing so may result in fire or
malfunction.
! Caution Do not apply any strong impact. Doing so may result in damage to the product or
malfunction.
! Caution Be sure to wire correctly and securely. Not doing so may result in injury or damage to
the product.
! Caution Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block. Not doing so may result in
fire, injury, or damage to the product.
! Caution Carefully handle the product because it uses semiconductor elements. Careless
handling may result in malfunction.
! Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the fol-
lowing locations. Not doing so may result in equipment damage.
S Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.

S Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic fields.
S Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
S Locations close to power supplies.
Operation and Adjustment Precautions
! Caution Do not carelessly change Inverter’s settings. Doing so may result in injury or dam-
age to the product.
! Caution Be sure to perform the setting switch settings correctly and confirm the settings be-
fore starting operation. Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage to the
product.
Thank you for choosing a SYSDRIVE 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Inverter and
DeviceNet Communications Card. This manual describes the specifications and
operating methods of the DeviceNet Communications Card used for exchanging
data between an Inverter and a Programmable Controller. Specifically, it
describes the operation methods, communications methods, and data setting
methods of the 3G3FV-PDRT1-SINV1 DeviceNet Communications Card. Proper
use and handling of the product will help ensure proper product performance, will
length product life, and may prevent possible accidents.
Please read this manual thoroughly and handle and operate the product with care.
For details about the 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Inverter and DeviceNet
communications system, refer to the following manuals.
SYSDRIVE 3G3RV User’s Manual (I532)
SYSDRIVE 3G3PV User’s Manual (I537)
SYSDRIVE 3G3FV User’s Manual (I516)
DeviceNet Unit Operation Manual (W380)
DeviceNet (CompoBus/D) Operation Manual (W267)
NOTICE
1. This manual describes the functions of the product and relations with other prod-
ucts. You should assume that anything not described in this manual is not possible.
2. The name “SYSMAC” in this manual refers to the SYSMAC CS/CJ-series,
C200HX/HG/HE, and CV-series Programmable Controllers that can be connected
to a DeviceNet System. (C200HS Programmable Controllers support only the re-
mote I/O function.)
3. Although care has been given in documenting the product, please contact your
OMRON representative if you have any suggestions on improving this manual.
4. The product contains potentially dangerous parts under the cover. Do not attempt
to open the cover under any circumstances. Doing so may result in injury or death
and may damage the product. Never attempt to repair or disassemble the product.
5. We recommend that you add the following precautions to any instruction manuals
you prepare for the system into which the product is being installed.
S Precautions on the dangers of high-voltage equipment.
S Precautions on touching the terminals of the product even after power has been
turned off. (These terminals are live even with the power turned off.)
6. Specifications and functions may be changed without notice in order to improve
product performance.
Items to Check Before Unpacking

Check the following items before removing the product from the package:
S Has the correct product been delivered (i.e., the correct model number and speci-
fications)?
S Has the product been damaged in shipping?
S Are any screws or bolts loose?
S Have all accessories been delivered together with or attached to the product?
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified
operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Al-
ways heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in inju-
ry to people or damage to property.
! DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death
or serious injury.
! WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death
or serious injury.
! Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References

All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when
it refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name
of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products,
often means “word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation
for anything else.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different
types of information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
 OMRON, 1998
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because
OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual
is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Never-
theless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for dam-
ages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
Table of Contents
Chapter 1. Functions and System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2 New Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3 DeviceNet Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4 DeviceNet System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-2 Configurator Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-3 DeviceNet Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4-4 Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2. DeviceNet Communications Line Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1 Network Configuration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-1 Network Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1-2 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2 Network Configuration Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-1 Baud Rate and Communications Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2-2 Locating Terminating Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3 Communications Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-1 Locating the Communications Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-2 Step 1: Determining the Best Location for the Power Supply from a Graph . . . . . . .
2-3-3 Step 2: Calculating the Best Location of the Actual Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-4 Step 3: Splitting the System into Multiple Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-3-5 Dual Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4 Communications Line Noise Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-1 Communications Line Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-2 Grounding the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-3 Communications Power Supply Noise Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-4 Noise Prevention Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-4-5 Noise Prevention for Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3. Setup and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1 Nomenclature and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-1 Names of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-2 Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-3 Operation Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1-4 Baud Rate and Node Address Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2 Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-1 DeviceNet Communications Card Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2-2 Communications Cable Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 4. DeviceNet System Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-1 SYSMAC Word Allocations and Scan List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-1 Overview and Restrictions of Word Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-2 Scan List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-3 Fixed Word Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-1-4 Free Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-1 3G3RV and 3G3PV Inverters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-2-2 3G3FV Inverters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-3 Startup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
Chapter 5. DeviceNet Communications Card Operations . . . . . . . . .

5-1 Remote I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1 Standard Remote I/O (Initial Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-2 Types of Remote I/O Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-2 Switching Remote I/O Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3 Special Remote I/O Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-1 Overview of Special Remote I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-2 Special Remote I/O Communications Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3-3 Parameter Register Numbers for Each Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-4 Control Remote I/O Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5 Message Communications (DeviceNet Explicit Messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-1 Overview of Message Communications (Explicit Message Operations) . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-2 Sending and Receiving Messages with a CS1W-DRM21 or CJ1W-DRM21
DeviceNet Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-3 Sending and Receiving Messages with C200HW-DRM21-V1 DeviceNet Master Unit
5-5-4 CVM1-DRM21-V1 DeviceNet Master Unit Message Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-5 Overview of Messages and Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-6 Motor Data Objects: Class 28 Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-7 Control Supervisor Objects: Class 29 Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-8 AC/DC Drive Objects: Class 2A Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-5-9 Reading and Writing Parameters: Class 64 Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6 3G3RV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-1 Inputting Control/Frequency (Read/Write) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-2 Inverter Monitoring Functions (Read) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6-3 Parameter Reading and Writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7 3G3PV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-1 Inputting Control/Frequency (Read/Write) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-7-2 Inverter Monitoring Functions (Read) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8 3G3FV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-1 Inputting Control/Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-8-2 Inverter Monitoring Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 6. Communications Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1 Communications Line Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-2 Message Communications Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-3 Special Remote I/O Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-4 Inverter Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 7. Communications Programs (SYSMAC CS-series PCs) . .

7-1 Standard Remote I/O Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2 Message Communications Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-1 Inverter Fault Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-2-2 Reading/Writing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3 Special Remote I/O Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-1 Simple Operation Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-2 Reading Parameter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-3-3 Writing Parameter Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
Chapter 8. Appendices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2 Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-1 Identify Objects (Identification Information): Class 01 Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-2 Message Router Objects: Class 02 Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-3 DeviceNet Objects: Class 03 Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-4 Assembly Objects: Class 04 Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-2-5 DeviceNet Connection Objects: Class 05 Hex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-3 DeviceNet Communications Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
Chapter 1
Functions and System

Configuration
1-1 Functions
1-2 New Functions
1-3 DeviceNet Features
1-4 DeviceNet System Configuration
Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1
1-1 Functions
The 3G3FV-PDRT1-SINV1 DeviceNet Communications Card is a dedicated communications interface
card that makes it possible for the SYSDRIVE 3G3RV, 3G3PV, and 3G3FV Inverters to communicate
with SYSMAC Programmable Controllers. Installing a DeviceNet Communications Card in a SYS-
DRIVE 3G3RV, 3G3PV, or 3G3FV Inverter permits a Programmable Controller to monitor RUN/STOP
and operating conditions, and to make changes in set values.
3G3FV-PDRT1-SINV1
DeviceNet Communications Card
S Easy Communications
The following two functions can be used simultaneously in DeviceNet communications between the
CPU Unit of a SYSMAC PC and a SYSDRIVE 3G3RV, 3G3PV, or 3G3FV Inverter.
Remote I/O Communications
I/O is automatically transferred between Slaves and the CPU Unit without any special program-
ming in the CPU Unit. (Automatically transmits Inverter control inputs such as RUN or STOP from
a SYSMAC PC to the SYSDRIVE Inverter and returns operation status of the Inverter or output
frequency monitor data. )
Message Communications
Message communications are performed between a CPU Unit to which a Master Unit is mounted
and Slaves (SYSDRIVE 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Inverters) by executing specific instructions
(such as CMND and IOWR, depending on the model of SYSMAC PC used) from the program in
the CPU Unit. (Allows some parameter setting and monitoring, Inverter output frequency, output
voltage, or output current. If the remote I/O communications is not performed, Inverter control
data such as RUN or STOP can be input through this message communications function.)
Remote I/O communications for the DeviceNet Communications Card are performed using either 4 or 8
words allocated in the I/O Area of the SYSMAC PC. The Inverter can be controlled using remote I/O
communications because the basic control I/O functions, frequency setting functions, and output fre-
quency monitoring functions are assigned to remote I/O. The allows the Inverter to be controlled
through simple I/O processing.
S Communications with SYSMAC CS/CJ-series, C200HX/HG/HE, and

CV-series PCs
The DeviceNet communications system is supported by both SYSMAC CS/CJ-series, C200HX/HG/
HE, and CV-series Programmable Controllers. Up to twice as many Inverters can be connected in com-
parison to SYSMAC BUS Remote I/O Systems to support even larger control systems.
1-2
Note 1. The maximum number of nodes that can be connected to the system depends on the type of
Master Unit used, whether the message function is used, and the number of words used by
remote I/O communications. See 1-4 DeviceNet System Configuration for further details.
Note 2. The SYSMAC CS/CJ-series includes the CS1G, CS1H and CJ1G Programmable Control-
lers. The SYSMAC CV Series includes the CV1000, CV2000, and CVM1 Programmable
Controllers. SYSMAC C200HS PCs support only remote I/O communications.
S Multi-vendor Network
DeviceNet conforms to the DeviceNet open field network specification, which means that devices (Mas-
ters and Slaves) produced by other manufacturers can also be connected to the Network. The Device-
Net Communications Card supports the DeviceNet AC/DC drive object.
S Choice of Communications Functions

The DeviceNet Communications Card has various functions to choose from to suit the Inverter applica-
tions.
Remote I/O Communications
Either basic remote I/O control or special remote I/O can be chosen for remote I/O allocation to
suit the application. Special I/O control can be used to control and set all functions for
3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV-series Inverters.
Basic Inverter control and monitoring is possible with DeviceNet explicit messages, which are
defined for AC/DC driver objects. Remote I/O and message communications can be used simul-
taneously, i.e., remote I/O control can be performed at the same time as other control using mes-
sage communications.
1-3
S Applicable to Various System Configurations

Remote I/O communications and message communications are available as communications func-
tions. Normal control inputs are controlled by the remote I/O communications function. When neces-
sary, the message communications function is used to monitor each Inverter.
Note For connecting the DeviceNet Communications Card of the Inverter, use DCA1-5C10 Thin
Cables and branch them from the T-branch Tap.
Thick Cables cannot be used for this kind of wiring because of the terminal block dimensions.
As for multi-drop wiring, use Thin Cables for direct insertion. Thick Cables cannot be used for this
kind of wiring.
Master Unit
CS1W-DRM21
CJ1W-DRM21
C200HW-DRM21-V1 Message communications function
CVM1-DRM21-V1
CMND (490) Reading Inverter
output current
SYSDRIVE Inverter
(3G3RV, 3G3PV, 3G3FV)
Remote I/O function

Output (PC to Inverter)
Wd 15 to 0 3G3FV-PDRT1-SINV1
n Inverter run commands DeviceNet
n+1 Rotational speed reference Communications Card
Note: T-branch wiring using Thin
Input (Inverter to PC) Cables
Switch
Run Reverse
Forward Stop Power supply

Motor
Selection of either the communications
control input or local control input is
possible using Net.Ctrl./Net.Ref.
1-4
1-2 New Functions
The software of the previous DeviceNet Communications Card (3G3FV-PDRT1-SIN) has been
upgraded with this model (3G3FV-PDRT1-SINV1), and new functions have been added.
Note The upgraded software used with this model is Ver. 2.0. The software version can be confirmed
using the Configurator.
S New Remote I/O Function

A new remote I/O function has been added to the three existing functions (basic remote I/O, standard
remote I/O, and special remote I/O). The new remote I/O, called control remote I/O, contains functional-
ity and arrays matching the Inverter control terminal I/O signals, and it provides easy-to-use specifica-
tions for reduced wiring.
Note The control remote I/O function does not conform to the AC/DC drive profile, but is specially set for
this product.
S Changes to Remote I/O Switching Methods

The four types of remote I/O functions use explicit messages for switching. The following table shows
the changed area settings for the remote I/O to be set.
Item Original area (before changes) New area (after changes)
Remote input switching Class: 100 (64 Hex) Class: 101 (65 Hex)
(SYSMAC ← Inverter) Instance: 01 (01 Hex) Instance: 01 (01 Hex)
Attribute: 202 (CA Hex) Attribute: 01 (01 Hex)
Remote output switching Class: 100 (64 Hex) Class: 101 (65 Hex)
(SYSMAC → Inverter) Instance: 01 (01 Hex) Instance: 01 (01 Hex)
Attribute: 203 (CB Hex) Attribute: 02 (02 Hex)
S Parameter Reading and Writing Using Explicit Messages

An event parameter reading and writing function has been added that uses explicit messages. Although
previously it was necessary to set special remote I/O to read and write parameters, explicit messages
can now be used so that remote I/O can be selected more freely.
S New Communications Power Supply Interrupt Detection Function

A function has been added that detects interruptions in the communications power supply and detects
errors if the DeviceNet communications power supply falls below the specified voltage.
S 3G3RV Special Remote I/O Supported from Version VSF105091

(VSF105081)
Special remote I/O can be used with the 3G3RV beginning with 3G3RV software version VSF105091
(Asian models: VSF105081). Special remote I/O is not supported by earlier versions.
Note Other DeviceNet communications functions can be used regardless of the software version.
1-5
1-3 DeviceNet Features
S System Configuration Example

Master by
OMRON Master Unit other company OMRON Master Unit OMRON Configurator
DeviceNet Network
OMRON Configurator
OMRON Slaves OMRON Slaves
Slaves by other company

DeviceNet Network
Slaves by other company Slaves by other company

OMRON Slaves
S Multi-vendor Network
DeviceNet conforms to the DeviceNet open field network specification, which means that devices (Mas-
ters and Slaves) produced by other manufacturers can also be connected to the Network. Therefore, a
wide range of field-level applications can be supported by combining valve devices, sensors, and other
devices.
S Simultaneous Remote I/O and Message Services

Remote I/O communications to constantly exchange I/O data between the PC and Slaves can be
executed simultaneously with message communications, to send/receive Master Unit data as required
by the application. Therefore, a DeviceNet Network can be installed to flexibly handle applications that
require both bit data and message data. Message communications can be achieved either by using
OMRON’s FINS commands or by using DeviceNet explicit messages.
S Connect Multiple PCs to the Same Network

A Configurator (sold separately) can be used to enable connection of more than one Master to the Net-
work, allowing message communications between PCs and between multiple groups of PCs and
Slaves. This allows the DeviceNet Network to be used as a common bus to unify controls while reducing
wiring.
S Handle Multi-point Control and Line Expansions with Multi-layer

Networks
A Configurator (sold separately) can be used to enable mounting more than one Master Unit to a single
PC, allowing control of many more points. This feature can easily handle line expansions and other ap-
plications.
1-6
S Free Remote I/O Allocation

A Configurator (sold separately) can be used to enable flexible allocation of I/O, i.e., in any area and in
any order. This allows I/O allocations that suit the application to simplify programming and enable effec-
tive usage of PC memory areas.
S Handle Slaves with Different Response Speeds

A Configurator (sold separately) can be used to set the communications cycle time, enabling usage of
Slaves with slow response times.
S Easily Expand or Change Lines with Various Connection Methods

Use a multi-drop trunk line, T-branch multi-drop lines, or daisy-chain drop lines. All three connection
methods can be combined to flexibly construct a Network that meets the needs of the application.
Note For connecting the DeviceNet Communications Card of the Inverter, use DCA1-5C10 Thin
Cables and branch them from the T-branch Tap.
1-7
1-4 DeviceNet System Configuration
1-4-1 System Configuration

Open field network DeviceNet is a multi-bit, multi-vendor network that combines controls and data on a
machine/line-control level.
Two types of communications are supported: 1) Remote I/O communications that automatically trans-
fer I/O between Slaves and the CPU Unit of a SYSMAC PC without any special programming in the CPU
Unit and 2) Message communications are performed between a CPU Unit to which a Master Unit is
mounted and Slaves by executing specific instructions (such as CMND and IOWR, depending on the
model of SYSMAC PC used) from the program in the CPU Unit.
A Configurator (sold separately) can be used to enable following. This allows the support of an even
larger control system.
I/O area words can be flexibly allocated for remote I/O communications.
More than one Master Unit can be mounted to a single PC.
More than one Master Unit can be connected in a single Network.
S Fixed Allocation: Configuration without a Configurator

CS1W-DRM21, CJ1W-DRM21,
C200HW-DRM21-V1, CVM1-DRM21-V1
DeviceNet Master Unit
SYSDRIVE
3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV
Slave Slave Slave Slave
Inverter
3G3FV-PDRT1-SINV1
CS/CJ-series PCs: 64 nodes max. (including the Master Unit)

CV-series PCs: 64 nodes max. (including the Master Unit)
C200HX/HG/HE PCs: 64 nodes max. (including the Master Unit)
C200HS PCs: 33 nodes max. (including the Master Unit)
Note 1. The Master Unit occupies one node of the DeviceNet Network.
Note 2. If C200HS PCs are used, only remote I/O communications are possible.
Note 3. If one node uses more than one word, the maximum number of nodes will be reduced by one
node for each extra word that is used.
1-8
S Free Allocation: Configuration with a Configurator

C200HW-DRM21-V1 or CVM1-DRM21-V1
DeviceNet Master Unit 3G8F5-DRM21 (ISA Board)
or
SG8E2-DRM21 (PC Card)
Configurator
SYSDRIVE 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Inverter

Slave Slave Slave
3G3FV-PDRT1-SINV1
64 nodes max. (including the Master Unit)
Slave Slave Slave

Configurator
64 nodes max. (including the Master Unit)
Note 1. The Master Unit and Configurator each occupy one node of the DeviceNet Network.
Note 2. If C200HS PCs are used, only remote I/O communications are possible.
Note 3. The maximum number of nodes that can be connected to the Network will be limited by the
maximum number of control points of the PC used.
1-4-2 Configurator Overview

The Configurator is a software application run on a computer and is used to support a DeviceNet com-
munications system. The Configurator can be connected to the network via a serial communications
port (using Peripheral Bus or Host Link), or it can be connected directly using an interface (hardware) for
connecting computers to the DeviceNet Network. The Configurator occupies one node on the Device-
Net Network, but has no specific functions on the network itself. The Configurator provides the following
functions.
Free Allocation of Remote I/O
The remote I/O allocations in the PCs can be changed from the Configurator. I/O can be flexibly
allocated for each node within the specified I/O areas.
More than One Master Unit per Network
1-9
Slaves can be set for each Master Unit from the Configurator enabling communications between
multiple groups of PCs and Slaves. The maximum number of nodes connected to one Network
remains at 64. One Slave can be connected to no more than one Master Unit.
More than one Master Unit per PC
Remote I/O can be allocated for each Slave of the Master Unit from the Configurator, so more
than one Master Unit can be mounted to the same PC.
Note In allocating Remote I/O for each Master Unit, be careful not to allow any dual allocation.
S Configurator Specifications
Item WS02-CFDC1-E 3G8F5-DRM21 3G8E2-DRM21
Personal computer --- Desktop model Notebook model
Components Installation disk Installation disk (software) Installation disk (software)
(software) Dedicated ISA Board Dedicated PCMCIA Card
DeviceNet Interface Unit
Operating Hardware Computer: IBM PC/AT or compatible
environment CPU: Windows NT: 166 MHz Pentium min.
Memory: 32 MB min.
Hard disk: 15 MB min. free space
OS Windows 95, 98, 2000, or NT 4.0
DeviceNet No accessories Dedicated ISA Board Dedicated PCMCIA Card

interface DeviceNet Interface Unit
Relation to Network Operates as one node on the Network, requires one node address, and only
one Configurator can be connected to the Network. (The Configurator can be
disconnected from the Network after remote I/O has been allocated.)
1-10
1-4-3 DeviceNet Communications Specifications

Item Specifications
Communications protocol DeviceNet
Supported connections (commu- Master-Slave: Remote I/O and explicit messages
nications) Peer-to-peer: FINS messages
Both conform to DeviceNet specifications.
Connection forms Combination of multi-drop and T-branch connections (for trunk and drop
lines)
Baud rate 500 Kbps, 250 Kbps, or 125 Kbps (switchable)
Communications media Special 5-wire cables (2 signal lines, 2 power lines, and 1 shield line)
Thick Cable: DCA2-5C10 (100 m)
Thin Cable: DCA1-5C10 (100 m)
Communications 500 Kbps Network length: 100 m max.
distances Drop line length: 6 m max.
Total drop line length: 39 m max.
250 Kbps Network length: 250 m max.
Drop line length: 6 m max.
125 Kbps Network length: 500 m max.
Drop line length: 6 m max.
Communications power supply 24 VDC $1%, supplied externally
(Slave power supply: 11 to 25 VDC)
Recommended power supply: OMRON S82H Series or S82J Series
Max. number of nodes 64 nodes
Max. number of Masters Without Configurator: 1
With Configurator: 63
Max. number of Slaves Without Configurator: 63
With Configurator: 63
Error control CRC check
1-4-4 Inverter
The maximum number of Inverters that can be connected to one Network depends on the PC model
that is used, the remote I/O functions of the Inverter, and whether message communications are used or
not. (Use the message communications function for setting some parameters and for monitoring the
output current.) The differences between models are provided in the following tables.
1-11
S CS1W-DRM21 or CJ1W-DRM21 Master Units
D Communications without Configurator: Fixed Allocations

Applicable PC CS Series CJ Series
Master Unit CS1W-DRM21 CJ1W-DRM21
Supported communications Remote I/O and messages
Maximum number of Slaves per 63
Master Unit
Maximum number of controlled 2,048
points per Master Unit
Allocation areas Select one of the following settings, using the software switch (Fixed
Area Setting 1, 2, or 3 Switch) in the words allocated to the Master
Unit in the CIO Area:
1. OUT: CIO 3200 to CIO 3263; IN: CIO 3300 to CIO 3363 (default)
2. OUT: CIO 3400 to CIO 3463; IN: CIO 3500 to CIO 3563
3. OUT: CIO 3600 to CIO 3663; IN: CIO 3700 to CIO 3763
Allocation method Words are allocated for each node to the above data areas in node
address order only.
8-point Slaves: Allocated 1 word (1 node address)
16-point Slaves: Allocated 1 word (1 node address)
Slaves with more than 16 points: Allocated multiple words (multiple
node addresses)
Maximum Without explicit 4 words remote I/O: 32
number of messages 6 words remote I/O: 21
Inverters
8 words remote I/O: 16
With explicit 4 words remote I/O: 32
messages 6 words remote I/O: 21
8 words remote I/O: 16
D Communications with Configurator: Free Allocations

Master Unit CS1W-DRM21 CJ1W-DRM21
Supported communications Remote I/O and messages
Maximum number of Slaves per 63
Master Unit
Maximum number of controlled Using Settings in Words Allocated in DM Area: 16,000 points (IN: 500
points per Master Unit words × 1 block; OUT: 500 words × 1 block
Using Configurator: 32,000 points (IN: 500 words × 2 blocks; OUT: 500
words × 2 blocks
Allocation areas CIO 0000 to CIO 6143
WR: W000 to W511
HR: H000 to H511
DM: D00000 to D32767
EM: E00000 to E32767
1-12

Allocation method Words are allocated to each node in the above data areas in any order.
The following limitations apply:
• Using Settings in Words Allocated to Master Unit in DM Area:
The following limitations apply when allocating words using settings
in the DM Area.
Words are allocated in 2 blocks (OUT 1, IN 1). Each block consists of
sequential words.
Words for each slave are allocated inside the allocated words in
order of node number.
(It is not necessary to allocate words to unused node numbers.)
The leftmost byte of a word cannot be allocated to an 8-point Slave.
• Using the Configurator:
Using the Configurator allows much wider allocation than using
settings in the DM Area.
Words are allocated in 4 blocks (OUT 1, OUT 2, IN 1, IN 2). Each
block consists of sequential words.
Words for each slave can be allocated inside the allocated words in
any order.
• Limitations That Apply to Both Methods
The following limitations apply when allocating words using either
settings in the DM Area or using the Configurator.
The maximum that can be allocated in one block is 500 words.
For Slaves with more than 8 points, the first byte cannot be specified
as the leftmost byte (7 to 15).
The same Slave cannot be used for more than one Master Unit.
Words are allocated to Slaves as follows:
• 8-point Slaves: Allocated leftmost or rightmost byte of a word.
• 16-point Slaves: Allocated 1 word.
• Slaves with more than 16 points: Allocated multiple words (for Slaves
with an odd number of bytes, the last byte will be the rightmost byte).
Maximum number of Inverters 63
(using one Master Unit only)
Maximum number of Inverters with Calculate from the number of words allocated in the data areas and the
more than one Master Unit number of words allocated to the Inverters (4 to 8 words).
The DM Area cannot be manipulated by bit, so it cannot be allocated
for remote I/O for Inverters.
1-13
S C200HW-DRM21-V1 or CVM1-DRM21-V1 Master Units
D Communications without Configurator: Fixed Allocation

Applicable PC CV Series CS Series/ C200HS
C200HX/HG/HE
Master Unit CVM1-DRM21-V1 C200HW-DRM21-V1
Supported communica- Remote I/O and messages Remote I/O and mes- Remote I/O
tions sages
Max. No. of Slaves per 63 50 32
Master Unit
Max. No. of controlled 2,048 1,600 1,024
points per Master Unit
Allocation areas OUT: CIO 1900 to CIO 1963 OUT: IR 050 to IR 099 OUT: IR 50 to IR 81
IN: CIO 2000 to CIO 2063 IN: IR 350 to IR 399 IN: IR 350 to IR 381
Allocation method Words are allocated for each node to the above data areas in node address or-
der only.
8-point Slaves: Allocated 1 word
16-point Slaves:Allocated 1 word
Slaves with more than 16 points: Allocated multiple words
Max. No. Without ex- 4 words remote I/O: 32 4 words remote I/O: 25 4 words remote I/O: 16
of plicit mes- 6 words remote I/O: 21 6 words remote I/O: 16 6 words remote I/O: 10
Inverters sages
8 words remote I/O: 16 8 words remote I/O: 12 8 words remote I/O: 8
With explicit 4 words remote I/O: 32 4 words remote I/O: 25 –
messages 6 words remote I/O: 21 6 words remote I/O: 16
8 words remote I/O: 16 8 words remote I/O: 12
D Communications with Configurator: Free Allocation

C200HX/HG/HE
Master Unit CVM1-DRM21-V1 C200HW-DRM21-V1
Supported communications Remote I/O and Remote I/O and Remote I/O
messages messages
Max. No of Slaves per 63 63 63
Master Unit
Max. No. of controlled points 6,400 (100 words 4 Without messages: 1,280 (total of 4 blocks)
per Master Unit blocks) 4,800
With messages: 1,600
1-14

C200HX/HG/HE
Allocation areas Core I/O Area: IR Area 1: IR 000 to IR 235
CIO 0000 to IR Area 2: IR 300 to IR 511
CIO 2555
CIO 0000 to
CIO 2427 for
CV500/CVM1-CPU01(-
V)
CPU Bus Link Area: HR Area: HR 00 to HR 99
G008 to G255 LR Area: LR 00 to LR 63
DM Area: DM Area: DM Area:
D00000 to DM 0000 to DM 5999 DM 0000 to DM 5999
D24575 DM 0000 to DM 4095
D00000 to for C200HE-CPU11 (-Z)
D08191 for
CV500/CVM1-CPU01
(-V)
Allocation method Words are allocated to each node in the above data areas in any order using
the Configurator.
The following limitations apply:
The allocation areas are in 4 blocks (OUT 1, OUT 2, IN 1, and IN 2).
Each block consists of sequential words.
100 words max. per block.
For Slaves with more than 8 points, the first byte cannot be specified
in leftmost bits (7 to 15).
Words are allocated to Slaves as follows:
8-point Slaves: Allocated leftmost or rightmost byte of 1 word
16-point Slaves:Allocated 1 word
Slaves with more than 16-points: Allocated multiple words (For Slaves with
an odd number of bytes, the last byte will be the rightmost byte)
Max. No. of Without 63 4 remote I/O words: 63 4 words remote I/O: 20
Inverters explicit 6 remote I/O words: 50 6 words remote I/O: 13
(using
( g one messages 8 remote I/O words: 37 8 remote I/O words: 10
Master Unit With explicit 63 4 remote I/O words: 25 ---
only) messages 6 remote I/O words: 16
8 remote I/O words: 12
Max. No. Inverters with more Calculate from the number of words allocated in the data areas and the
than one Master Unit number of words allocated to the Inverters (4 or 6 words).
Note 1. The DM Area cannot be manipulated by bit, so it cannot be allocated
for remote I/O for Inverters.
Note 2. If the CPU Bus Link is used with a CV-series PC, the CPU Bus Link
Area will be used for the CPU Bus Link Therefore, the CPU Bus Link
Area cannot be allocated to Inverters if the CPU Bus Link is used.
1-15
2
Chapter 2
DeviceNet
Communications Line
Design
2-1 Network Configuration Overview
2-2 Network Configuration Restrictions
2-3 Communications Power Supply
2-4 Communications Line Noise Prevention
DeviceNet Communications Line Design Chapter 2
2-1 Network Configuration Overview

The following diagram shows the configuration of a DeviceNet Network.
Terminating Resistors Terminating Resistors
are connected at each Communications DeviceNet are connected at each
end of the trunk line. power supply cables are used. end of the trunk line.
24 VDC Power Supply Tap
Trunk
Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line or T-branch Tap M Trunk line M Trunk line
line
T T T T T
T-branch T-branch T-branch T-branch Node Node T-branch
Tap Tap Tap Tap Tap
Drop line Drop line T-branch Tap
DeviceNet
cables are used. Drop line Drop line Drop line M Node
T Node
Drop line
Node Node Node M Node Drop line

M Node
T: T-branch connection
M: Multi-drop connection
Node
DeviceNet cables (5-wire cables) are

used for the trunk lines and drop lines.
2-1-1 Network Components

S Nodes
There are two kinds of nodes on a DeviceNet Network: The Master and Slaves. The Slaves connect to
external I/O and the Master administers the Network and manages the external I/O of the Slaves. The
Master and Slaves can be connected at any location in the Network, as shown in the preceding diagram.
S Trunk/Drop Lines
The trunk line refers to the cable that has Terminating Resistors on both ends. Cables branching from
the trunk line are known as drop lines. The trunk line length does not necessarily coincide with the maxi-
mum length of the Network. DeviceNet communications are transmitted through 5-wire cables. The
cables come in thick and thin versions.
S Connection Methods
Two methods can be used to connect DeviceNet nodes: The T-branch method and the multi-drop meth-
od. With the T-branch method, the node is connected to a drop line created with a T-branch Tap. With the
multi-drop method, the node is directly connected to the trunk line or the drop line. Secondary branches
can be made from a drop line. Both of these connection methods can be used in the same Network.
S Terminating Resistors
Terminating Resistors are connected at each end of the trunk line to reduce signal reflection and stabi-
lize communications. There are two kinds of Terminating Resistors available: One that is provided with
a T-branch Tap and a Terminal-block Terminating Resistor. Use a DeviceNet Cable when connecting a
Terminal-block Terminating Resistor.
S Communications Power Supplies

To use DeviceNet, connect a communications power supply to the communications connector of each
node with a 5-wire cable. Basically, a communications power supply, internal circuit power supply, and
I/O power supply must be provided separately.
2-2
2-1-2 Connections
S Trunk and Drop Lines

The trunk line is a cable to which Terminating Resistors are connected at the ends. Drop lines are cables
that branch from the trunk lines. A special 5-wire cable is used for both the trunk lines and the drop lines.
S Branching Patterns
Branching Patterns from Trunk Line

1.One drop line from 2.Three drop lines (maximum) 3.Node connected directly to
trunk line from trunk line trunk line
Multi-drop
Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line
T-branch Tap T-branch Tap

Node
Drop line
T-branch Tap
Node
Node Node Node
Branching Patterns from Drop Line

4 One drop line from 5.Three drop lines (maximum) 6.Node connected directly to
drop line from drop line drop line
Multi-drop
Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line
T-branch Tap T-branch Tap

Node
Drop line
T-branch Tap
Node
Node Node Node
Various forms of connection can be used on the same Network, as shown in the
following diagram. Any number of nodes up to 63 can be connected onto a single
drop line.
Note Design the Inverter wiring for T-branch wiring purposes using Thin
Cables.
Communications
power supply
24 VDC
Trunk line Trunk line
Terminating Power Supply Tap Terminating

or T-branch Tap Node
Resistor Resistor
Node
Drop Drop line Drop Node
line line
Node Node Node Node Node Node
Node
2-3
2-2 Network Configuration Restrictions

DeviceNet communications are designed to meet a wide range of applications by providing a choice of
baud rates and allowing different combinations of T-branch and multi-drop connections. The restric-
tions of DeviceNet communications that are required to enable the various communications possibili-
ties are described here.
2-2-1 Baud Rate and Communications Distance

The maximum length of the DeviceNet communications cables is restricted by the baud rate and the
type of cable used. The three types of restrictions on DeviceNet communications cable length are as
follows:
Maximum network length
Drop line length
Total drop line length
Be sure to design and configure a Network that meets the conditions provided below to ensure reli-
able communications.
S Maximum Communications Distance

Baud rate Maximum network length Drop line length Total drop line
length
Thick Cable Thin Cable
500 kbps 100 m max. 100 m max. 6 m max. 39 m max.

Note Thick Cable (5-wire): DCA2-5C10 (100 m)

Thin Cable (5-wire): DCA1-5C10 (100 m)
S Maximum Network Length

The length of the Network is longest at either the distance between the two most distant nodes or at the
distance between the Terminating Resistors.
There are two types of cables: Thick Cables and Thin Cables. The cable thickness affects signal deteri-
oration. The maximum length of the Network therefore depends on the type of cable used as shown in
the previous table.
The following restrictions apply to Networks in which both Thick and Thin Cables are combined.
Baud rate Maximum Network length
500 kbps Thick Cable length + Thin Cable length $ 100 m
250 kbps Thick Cable length + 2.5 Thin Cable length $ 250 m
125 kbps Thick Cable length + 5.0 Thin Cable length $ 500 m
S Drop Line Length

The length of the drop line is measured from the point in the trunk line where the original branch was
made to the end of the branch. The maximum length of a drop line is 6 m. It is possible to make a second-
ary branch from a drop line.
2-4
S Total Drop Line Length

The total drop line length is the total sum length of all the drop lines (but not including the trunk line). Do
not exceed the maximum total drop line length (even when the length of each individual drop line is 6 m
or less). The standard for the total drop line length varies with the baud rate as shown in the previous
table.
S Configuration Example
The following configuration example shows the maximum length of the Network, the drop line lengths,
and the total drop line length.
Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line
10 m 10 m 20m
Terminating Terminating
Resistor Resistor
2m
2m 3m 6m
Node
Node 2m
1m
Node
Node
1m
1m 2m 2m 6m 6m 6m
Node
Node
Node Node Node Node Node
Drop line Drop line Drop line Drop line

2m 5m 6m 6m
Maximum Network The longest distance between nodes is 48 m, and the distance between the two
Length Terminating Resistors is 40 m. The maximum Network length is therefore 48 m.
Drop Line Length There are four branch points in the trunk line. The length of each drop line is
shown in the diagram. The maximum drop line length is 6 m.
Total Drop Line Length The sum of all the drop lines is 40 m.
2-2-2 Locating Terminating Resistors

Be sure to connect the Terminating Resistors at both ends of the trunk line to reduce signal reflection
and stabilize communications.
When there is a T-branch Tap 6 m or less from the end of the trunk line (or the node):
A Terminating Resistor attached to a T-branch Tap can easily be mounted without taking up much
space.
When there is not a T-branch Tap 6 meters or less from the end of the trunk line (or the node):
A Terminating Resistor must be connected before that point. Either a T-branch Tap mounted to a
Terminating Resistor or a terminal block with Terminating Resistor can be used. In this case, be sure
to make the cable length 1 m or less from the node to the Terminating Resistor.
1 m or less
Truck line T-branch Tap mounted to a Terminating Resistor

or a terminal block with Terminating Resistor.
Node
Node at end of trunk line
2-5
2-3 Communications Power Supply
2-3-1 Locating the Communications Power Supply
S Basic Concept
• The communications power supply must be 24 VDC.
• Make sure that the power is supplied from the trunk line.
• When providing power to several nodes from one power supply, if possible try to locate the nodes in
both directions from the power supply.
• Provide power through Power Supply Taps. It is, however, possible to use T-branch Taps instead when
there is one communications power supply in the system and the total current consumption is less
than 5 A.
• The power supply capacity for cables is restricted to 8 A for Thick Cables and 3 A for Thin Cables.
• A single Network is usually supplied by one power supply. It is, however, possible to have more than
one power supply when power supply specifications cannot be met with a single power supply. (See
2-3-4 Step 3: Splitting the System into Multiple Power Supplies.)
• Fully consider the power supply capacity allowance in the design.
• If the power supply is switched OFF during the operation of the Network, there may be a malfunction in
the nodes.
• The current capacity of the drop line varies according to its length. The longer the drop line, the lower
its maximum capacity becomes. This is the same whether the cable is thick or thin. Calculate the cur-
rent capacity passing through the drop line I (the total current consumption at the drop line) using the
following formula.
I = 4.57/L I: Permissible current (A)
L: Length of the drop line (m)
2-6
S Flowchart
Use the flowchart below to determine the communications power supply on the trunk line. Satisfy the
conditions for each drop line on page 2-6.
Provisionally determine the
location of the power supply.
Step 1
Determine the best location of the

power supply from the graphs.
Are the power supply No

specifications met?
Consider changing the

Yes location of the power supply.
Consider using Thick Cable.

specifications met?
Step 2
Yes Calculate the best location

of the actual nodes.

specifications met?
Consider changing the location of

Yes the power supply.
Consider using Thick Cable.
Consider changing the location of
high current consumption nodes.

specifications met?
Step 3
Split the power supply
Yes system by installing more
than two power supplies.
Set the location for
the power supply.
S Power Supply Location Patterns

The power supply can be located in the configurations shown below. Basically, select from the configu-
rations 1 and 2.
Consider using configuration 3 when power supply specifications cannot be met by configurations 1
and 2. It is possible to use configuration 4 for a duplex power supply.
2-7
1 Locating the Nodes on Both Sides of the Power Supply
Power Supply Tap
or T-branch Tap
Communications
Node Node Node power supply Node Node
2 Locating the Nodes on One Side of the Power Supply

Note Configuration 1 is recommended for a single power supply to several nodes.
Power Supply Tap
or T-branch Tap
Communications
power supply Node Node Node Node Node
3 Splitting the Power Supply System with Multiple Power Supplies

System 1 System 2
Special Power Supply Tap Special Power Supply Tap
Communications Communications
power supply Node Node power supply Node Node Node
Remove the fuse

and split +V.
fuse
V+ Make –V the same for
Systems 1 and 2.
V–
24 V 0V
4 Duplex Power Supply with Multiple Power Supplies

Special Power Special Power
Supply Tap Supply Tap
Communications Communications
power supply Node Node Node Node Node power supply
Note 1. If power supply specifications cannot be met with a single power supply when the current ca-
pacity of the Thick Cable exceeds 8 A even after the power supply location is modified, use
more than one communications power supply.
Note 2. In configuration 1, the power can be supplied in two directions to the trunk line as long as the
current capacity of each is 8 A or less when using Thick Cable, i.e., it is possible to have a
configuration with a total maximum current capacity of up to 16 A.
2-8
Note 3. Consider changing to Thick Cable to meet specifications if the current capacity of the Thin
Cable exceeds 3 A when using Thin Cable for the trunk line.
S Setting the Power Supply Location

Determine whether or not the current can be supplied normally by finding the current capacity required
by each node and the voltage drop in the cables to be used to provide power. Calculate the values below
in advance.
• The current capacity required by each node
• The distance between the power supply and each node
The current capacity of the 3G3FV-PDRT1-SINV1 DeviceNet Communications Card is approximately
20 mA.
S Calculating the Power Supply Location

There are two methods to find the best location of the communications power supply on the trunk line.
• Simple calculation from a graph
• Calculation by formula (Calculating the voltage drop from resistance and current consumption of the
communications cables).
Each drop line must satisfy the equation on page 2-6, which represents the relationship between the
drop line length and the current capacity for the drop line.
Note 1. From the graph, a hypothetical power supply location can be determined if the conditions cal-
culated in the graph are met by estimating the worst configuration (that has the maximum volt-
age drop as shown in the diagram below).
Node
Node
Node
Communications
power supply Node
Note 2. Even if the power supply specifications cannot be met using the graph, the conditions can be
met and a hypothetical power supply location determined by using the formula.
Note 3. When the communications power supply and the internal circuit supply are the same, use the
formula to calculate a hypothetical power supply location because it cannot be determined by
using the graph.
2-3-2 Step 1: Determining the Best Location for the Power

Supply from a Graph
A voltage drop occurs when a current flows through a communications cable. The longer the commu-
nications cable and the larger the current, the greater the voltage drop. The communications power
supply at each node must be 11 VDC or more. To ensure the correct power supply, the relationship is
plotted as shown in the following graph to find the maximum current that satisfies the voltage of the
communications power supply at different trunk line lengths even if there is a voltage drop due to cable
resistance.
2-9
S Thick Cable
Distance (m) 0 25 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
Max. current (A) 8.00 8.00 5.42 2.93 2.01 1.53 1.23 1.03 0.89 0.78 0.69 0.63
8
7
6
5
Max. current (A)
4
3
2
1
0
0
Distance (m)
S Thin Cable
Distance (m) 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Max. current (A) 3.00 3.00 3.00 2.06 1.57 1.26 1.06 0.91 0.80 0.71 0.64
3
Max. current (A)
0
0
Distance (m)
S Determining the Best Location of the Power Supply from a Graph

Verify the Items 1 to 3 below for each node located in the same direction viewed from the power supply.
Therefore, if nodes are located on both sides of the power supply, these items must be verified for all
nodes located in each direction.
1 Find A, the total current consumption of all the nodes to which communications power is to be sup-
plied.
2 Using the graph compute B, the maximum current flow in each cable from the power supply to the
end of the trunk line according to the types of cables (Thick Cables or Thin Cables).
3 Compare the values found in steps 1 and 2, above. If the first value (A) is less than the second (B),
this shows that power supply specifications are met and power can be supplied to all nodes at any
point in the Network.
Note Be sure to refer to the correct graph as the maximum current flow is different for Thick and Thin
Cables.
2-10
S Countermeasures
If the second value (B) is less than the first (A), use the following procedure to locate the communica-
tions power supply.
• Locate the communications power supply in the center of the Network and the nodes to both sides of it.
• If the nodes are already located at both sides of the power supply, move the power supply in the direc-
tion that requires the larger current capacity.
• If Thin Cable is being used, replace it with Thick Cable.
Note If, after following the above procedure, B is still less than A, go to Step 2 and determine the actual
position of the nodes by the formula calculation method.
D Calculation Example
The following example shows a Network that requires power to be supplied for 240 m on Thick Cable.
The power supply is located in the center of the Network. Because the power supply is in the center, the
maximum current will flow both to the left and to the right, enabling the supply of at least twice the maxi-
mum current as when the power supply is placed on the end of the Network. The current consumption
for individual nodes is as follows:
Terminating Resistor Trunk line Trunk line Terminating Resistor
(5-wire cable) (5-wire cable)
3 m max.
Communications
Node Node Node power supply Node Node Node
0.1 A 0.25 A 0.2 A 0.15 A 0.25 A 0.15 A
120 m 120 m
Trunk line
Power supply cable
Total power supply length on left = Total power supply length on right = 120 m
Total current consumption on left: 0.1 + 0.25 + 0.2 = 0.55 A
Total current consumption on right: 0.15 + 0.25 + 0.15 = 0.55 A
Maximum current for the left side of the Thick Cable (see previous table) = approx. 2.5 A
Maximum current for the right side of the Thick Cable (see previous table) = approx. 2.5 A
(using straight line approximation between 100 to 150 m)
2-3-3 Step 2: Calculating the Best Location of the Actual

Nodes
Go to Step 2 if the best location for the power supply according to the specifications cannot be deter-
mined from the graphs. The second method calculates the best location for each actual node and does
not estimate the worst possible configuration for the power supply.
Basically, in the DeviceNet Network the permissible maximum voltage drop within the system can be
specified at 5 V for a power supply line (+V or –V), by calculating the specifications for the voltage of the
communications power supply (24 VDC) and the input voltage of the communications power supply of
each device (11 to 25 VDC).
Of the permissible 5-V maximum voltage drop within the system, the permissible voltage drop is 4.65 V
in the trunk lines and 0.35 V in the drop lines.
2-11
The following formulae are applicable when power is supplied independently for communications
and the internal circuit. For details on voltage drop and formulae when the communications power
supply and internal circuit power supply are shared, refer to the DeviceNet Operation Manual.
S Formulae
Try to calculate the best location for each node using the formula below. If the best location for each
node can be determined using the formula, the specifications for the power supply to each node can
also be met. Do not exceed the maximum current capacity of the cable (Thick Cable: 8 A and Thin
Cable: 3 A).
{(L1 × RC + N1 × 0.005) × l1} + {(L2 × RC + N2 × 0.005) × l2} + ..... + {(Ln × RC + Nn × 0.005) × ln} $ 4.65 V
Li: The distance (m) of the trunk line between the power supply and node i.
Rc: Maximum cable resistance for approx. 1 m
(Thick Cable: 0.015 Ω/m, Thin Cable: 0.069 Ω/m)
Ni: The number of T-branch Taps on the trunk line between the power supply and node i.
Ii: The consumption current required for the communications power supply for node i.
0.005 Ω = The contact resistance of the T-branch Taps.
Note 1. If there are nodes on both sides of the power supply, the formula is used to calculate the best
location in each direction, and if the conditions are satisfied, then the locations are valid. The
conditions are satisfied if the following equations are true.
Voltage drop (V) on trunk line at left side $ 4.65 V
Voltage drop (V) on trunk line at right side $ 4.65 V
Note 2. The above formulae are for the communications power supply. For Unit power supplies, per-
form calculations according to the power supply specifications of the Units.
D Calculation Example
Terminating Resistor Trunk line Trunk line Terminating Resistor
(5-wire cable) (5-wire cable)
3m
max.
Communications
Node Node Node power supply Node Node Node
0.1 A 0.25 A 0.2 A 0.15 A 0.25 A 0.15 A
40 m 40 m 40 m 40 m 40 m 40 m
Left Side Equation

Node 1: (120 0.015 + 3 0.005) 0.1 = 0.1815 (V)
Node 2: (80 0.015 + 2 0.005) 0.25 = 0.3025 (V)
Node 3: (40 0.015 + 1 0.005) 0.2 = 0.121 (V)
If 0.1815 + 0.3025 + 0.121 = 0.605 V $ 4.65 V, the conditions are satisfied.
Right Side Calculation

Node 4: (40 0.015 + 1 0.005) 0.15 = 0.09075 (V)
Node 5: (80 0.015 + 2 0.005) 0.25 = 0.3025 (V)
Node 6: (120 0.015 + 3 0.005) 0.15 = 0.27225 (V)
If 0.09075 + 0.3025 + 0.27225 = 0.6655 V $ 4.65 V, the conditions are satisfied.
2-12
2-3-4 Step 3: Splitting the System into Multiple Power Supplies

Go to Step 3 if the best location for the nodes cannot be calculated from the formulae. In the third step,
there are multiple power supplies and the power supply system is split.
S Splitting the Power Supply System

• Be sure to use a Power Supply Tap for each power supply when the Network is supplied by two or more
power supplies.
• Remove the fuses in the Power Supply Tap to split the power supply system.
Once the power supply system is split, return to Step 1 or 2, and determine the best location of the nodes
in each system.
S Power Supply Tap Configuration

Connector C
Model 1485T-R2T5-T5
Fuse A Fuse B SpecificationPower supply tap
(with a grounding
terminal and reverse
Power supply cable current prevention
function )
Cable A
Manufacturer Allen-Bradley
Cable B
Connector A Connector B
S Internal Circuitry of the Power Supply Tap

Power Supply Tap
Fuse A Fuse B
V+ V+
CAN H CAN H
5-wire cables 5-wire cables
on side A Shield Shield
on side B
CAN L CAN L
V– V–
Schottky Fuses used:
diode Littel fuse 312008
Rated amperage: 8 A
Ground V– V+
Rated voltage: 250 V
terminal
6.35 Φ x 31.75 mm
Power supply device on side C
2-3-5 Dual Power Supplies

Because diodes are contained in Power Supply Taps, these taps can be used to construct a dual power
supply system in the Network. Dual power supply differs from parallel operation of power supplies, so
the following restrictions apply.
2-13
S Restrictions
Dual power supply is basically used to ensure backup power supply, not parallel operation of power
supplies. Therefore, each power supply to be used must meet the power allocation specifications (i.e.,
must satisfy steps 1 and 2).
2-14
2-4 Communications Line Noise Prevention
2-4-1 Communications Line Noise

The communications line sends and receives high-speed pulse signals, and checks whether the data is
correct by checking the sequence of the signals. If the amount of noise on the communications line is too
great, the interference will alter the communications signal data, and communications will be impossi-
ble. Communications lines are more sensitive and require higher speeds than normal I/O lines, so be
sure that noise does not interfere with communications. Use the preventative noise countermeasures
described here when configuring the system to ensure smooth system start up.
2-4-2 Grounding the Network
S Grounding the Network

The DeviceNet Network must be grounded at only one location so that a ground loop is not created. The
ground should also be connected as close as possible to the center of the Network. Connect the cable
shield to the ground terminal on the communications power supply and then connect to a ground of
100 Ω max., as shown in the following diagram.
Power Supply Tap
V+ V+
CAN H CAN H
Shield Shield Communications
CAN L cable
CAN L
V– V–
Ground V– V+
terminal
FG V– V+
Communications
power supply
Ground (100 Ω max.)
If more than one communications power supply is connected to the same Network, ground only the one
nearest the center of the Network. Do not connect the shield wire at the other power supplies.
Note 1. Always ground the communications cable shield at one and only one location in the Network.
Note 2. Always ground to 100 Ω or less.
Note 3. Always use a separate ground. Never use the same ground as for Inverters or other drive
system devices.
S Grounding the DeviceNet Communications Card

The DeviceNet Communications Card should be grounded according to DeviceNet recommendations
installing a noise filter as shown in the following diagram. The ground is normally wired to the ground
terminal (12 (G)).
2-15
Note If the cable grounded to the Inverter is not sufficient and is receiving noise interference, discon-
nect the grounding cable.
Shield
2-4-3 Communications Power Supply Noise Prevention

The communications power supply is the most important power supply in a DeviceNet Network. The
following measures will prevent noise in the communications power supply.
• Use the recommended power supply (S82H/S82J) for communications.
• Use an independent power supply for communications.
• Make sure to install a noise filter on the primary AC input side of the communications power supply.
• Always use a control system power supply for the primary AC side of the communications power sup-
ply that is not shared with power devices, such as Inverters or motors.
If noise interference remains in cables for which noise countermeasures have been implemented, the
following countermeasures may be effective.
D Communications Cable Shielding

Suspend the communications cable shielding wire without grounding it. This will filter the noise that
flows from the ground to the communications cable and will filter the noise current that flows in the
shielding wire.
D Communications Power Supply

Suspend the communications power supply without grounding it. This will also filter the noise that flows
from the communications power supply ground to the communications cable or the noise current that
flows in the shielding wire. The switching power supply is usually connected to the case and the capaci-
tor as shown below. The ground (FG) terminal must be suspended and the control panel for the power
supply itself must be insulated.
Switching Power Supply Configuration

Switching power supply
Power
AC power supply AC input supply DC output
circuit
Casing
2-16
Suspending the Communications Power Supply
S82J power supply
DC power supply
S82Y-N (Mounting Tool) Insulating material (such as

baked board or acrylic board)
When using S82J power supply When using other power supplies
2-4-4 Noise Prevention Wiring

To prevent inductive noise, do not wire the communications line, SYSMAC power lines, and other power
lines near to each other. Keep the power lines for Inverters, motors, regulators, and contactors, the
communications lines, and the SYSMAC power lines separated from each other by at least 300 mm.
Also, provide separate conduits or ducts for the communications lines and power lines.
Low-voltage cable
Communications cable Suspended duct Floor duct
Communications line
SYSMAC I/O Line
300 mm
Control cable max.
SYSMAC Power Line Communications line

General control circuit line 300 mm
Shielding SYSMAC I/O Line
Power cable max.
Power line
Power line
Ground (100 Ω max.)
• Do not install communications lines and SYSMAC power lines onto the control panel on which high-
voltage devices are mounted.
• Because noise currents flow through metallic equipment (such as casings), the communications
cables should be placed as far away from metallic equipment as possible.
• Ground the shielding wire on the communications cable at one point.
• If the same ground is used for the communications cables and communications power supply, there is
a possibility that noise may be transmitted through the ground line to the communications line. In order
to avoid this, be sure that the power line ground and the grounds for the communications cables and
the communications power supply are located as far from each other as possible.
! Caution Connect the communications signal lines (V+, CANH, shield, CANL, and V–) so that
they do not come into contact with each other.
If noise is generated, check the wiring.

Communications may be performed even if the V+ and CANH, or V– and CANL, are in contact
with each other, but differential operation will not be performed, reducing resistance to noise.
If the shield wire comes into contact with any of the signal lines, a high level of noise will be
superimposed on the line, reducing resistance to noise.
2-17
2-4-5 Noise Prevention for Peripheral Devices

• Install surge suppressors on devices that generate noise, particularly devices that have an inductive
component such as motors, transformers, solenoids, and magnetic coils.
Surge suppressor Surge suppressor
(Installed next to device) (Installed next to device)
DC input type Device AC input type Device

(such as a motor) (such as a motor)
• If a surge suppressor does not fit on the device, installing a ferrite core directly next to the device’s
contactors, such as a contactor may be effective.
Device
(such as a motor)
Ferrite core 0443-1641151
Nisshin Electric Co, Ltd.
• Insert a line filter on the primary side of the communications power supply.
• When there are two or more communications power supplies, the communications power cables can
be grounded by simply connecting a single Power Supply Tap near the center of the communications
cable. Do not ground shielding wire at more than one place.
T-branch Tap or Power Supply Tap Ground at only one point
or Communications Connector
Power Supply Tap Power Supply Tap
Master Master
PS Slave
Slave PS Slave PS Slave PS
When there is only one power supply When there are two or more power supplies
2-18
3 Chapter 3
Setup and Wiring

3-1 Nomenclature and Settings
3-2 Installation and Wiring
Setup and Wiring Chapter 3
3-1 Nomenclature and Settings
3-1-1 Names of Parts

Operation indicators
PWR indicator
Terminal block (TC) MS indicator
NS indicator
WD indicator
Node address and

baud rate setting
pins
Shielded grounding cable
3-1-2 Terminal Block

The following table provides details of the terminal block connected to the communications line.
Display Sticker color Code Cable color Details
1 Black V– Black Communications power supply ground.
2 Blue CAN L Blue Communications data low side.
3 --- SG (Shield) Shield connection.
4 White CAN H White Communications data high side.
5 Red V+ Red Communications power supply, 24 VDC.
Black Blue White Red
3-2
3-1-3 Operation Indicators

The DeviceNet Communications Card has 4 operation indicators that show the status of the power and
communications as described in the following table.
Indicator Display Meaning
g
Color Status
PWR Green Lit Power is being supplied from the Inverter to the Card.
--- Not lit Power is not being supplied from the Inverter.
The Card is not connected properly and power is not being supplied to it.
MS Green Lit The Card is operating normally.
Flashing Initial settings or necessary preparations for communications are incom-
plete.
Red Lit A fatal error (hardware error) has occurred in the Card.
Flashing A non-fatal error, such as a switch setting error, has occurred.
The Card is not connected properly and power is not being to supplied to it.
NS Green Lit The DeviceNet Network is operating normally.
(Communications connection established.)
Flashing The Network is normal, but the communications connection with the Master
Unit is not established.
Red Lit A fatal communications error has occurred.
A DeviceNet communications error was detected caused by node address
duplication or Bus OFF. (These errors make communications impossible.)
Flashing A non-fatal communications error has occurred due to communications
timeout.
--- Not lit A DeviceNet Network error has occurred. For example, the Network does
not exist, power is not supplied to the Card, or the baud rates do not match.
WD Green Flashing The CPU Unit of the Card is operating normally.
Red Lit The CPU Unit of the Card is not ready or the CPU Unit has malfunctioned.
The Card is not connected properly and power is not being to supplied to it.
Note When both of the baud rate setting pins DR0 and DR1 are set to ON, both the MS and NS will be lit
in red.
3-3
3-1-4 Baud Rate and Node Address Settings

In a DeviceNet Network, the baud rate can be set to 500 Kbps, 250 Kbps, or 125 Kbps. To manage
Master/Slave communications, numbers are assigned as node addresses.
Baud rate setting pins
Node address setting pins
Note Default settings are all OFF.
S Baud Rate Setting Pins

Pin 500 Kbps 250 Kbps 125 Kbps
DR1 ON OFF OFF
DR0 OFF ON OFF
S Node Address Setting Pins

Pin Node Address
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 to 63
ADR5 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF to ON
ADR4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF to ON
ADR3 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON to ON
ADR2 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON to ON
ADR1 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON to ON
ADR0 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON to ON
Note 1. The same node address cannot be used for more than one Slave connected to the commu-
nications line.
Note 2. Remote I/O allocations in the CPU Unit are affected by the node addresses, so make sure that
the remote I/O allocations do not overlap before setting a node address. Refer to Chapter 4
DeviceNet System Startup.
3-4
3-2 Installation and Wiring
! WARNING Do not touch the conductive parts such as internal PCBs or terminal blocks while
power is being supplied. Doing so may result in electrical shock.
! WARNING Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover, terminal covers,
bottom cover, Operator, and optional items. Leave them mounted in place while
power is being supplied. Not doing so may result in electrical shock, malfunction, or
damage to the product.
! WARNING Wiring, maintenance, or inspection must be performed by authorized personnel. Not

doing so may result in electrical shock or fire.
! WARNING Wiring, maintenance, or inspection must be performed after turning OFF the power
supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) is OFF, and after
waiting for the time specified on the Inverter front cover. Not doing so may result in
electrical shock.
! WARNING Do not damage, pull on, apply stress to, place heavy objects on, or pinch the cables.
Doing so may result in electrical shock, operation stoppage, or burning.
! WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the Unit. Doing either of these may result in
electrical shock, injury, or damage to the product.
! Caution Do not store, install, or operate the product in the following places. Doing so may
result in electrical shock, fire or damage to the product.
Locations subject to direct sunlight.

Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the
specifications.
Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.
Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
Locations subject to exposure to combustibles.
Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.
Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.
Locations subject to shock or vibration.
! Caution Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product. Doing so may result in fire or
malfunction.
! Caution Do not apply any strong impact. Doing so may result in damage to the product or
malfunction.
3-5
! Caution Be sure to wire correctly and securely. Not doing so may result in injury or damage to
the product.
! Caution Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block. Not doing so may result in
fire, injury, or damage to the product.
! Caution Carefully handle the product because it uses semiconductor elements. Careless
handling may result in malfunction.
! Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the fol-
lowing locations. Not doing so may result in equipment damage.
Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.

Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic fields.
Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.
Locations close to power supplies.
3-2-1 DeviceNet Communications Card Installation

! Caution Before installing and wiring an Optional Card, always turn OFF the power to the
SYSDRIVE 3G3RV/3G3PV/ 3G3FV Inverter and wait for the CHARGE indicator to
turn OFF.
S Mounting Procedure
1. Turn OFF the Inverter, wait for at least 5 minutes, remove the front cover of the Inverter, and check
that the CHARGE indicator is not lit.
2. Mount the Optional Card to the option C area.
3. Insert the provided spacers into the spacer holes on the mounting base of the Inverter.
4. After properly engaging the connectors of the Optional Card and control circuit board, insert the
spacers to the spacer holes of the Optional Card, and press the Optional Card until the spacers
click.
5. Connect the shielded ground cable of the Optional Card to FG terminal 12 (E) on the control circuit
board of the Inverter.
3-6
6. Press the top of the connector 2CN and check that the apexes of the triangular marks on both sides
match.
Option A
Control
Connector Circuit
4CN for Board
option A area
Option C
Make sure that the Connector
apexes of the black 2CN for
triangular marks match option C area
Connector
3CN for
option D area
Front View Side View
Note When the DeviceNet Communications Card is mounted, other Optional Cards cannot be
mounted in the C area.
3-2-2 Communications Cable Wiring
S Connecting Communications Cables

This section explains how to prepare and connect the communications cables to connectors for the
DeviceNet Network.
Use the following procedure to prepare and connect the communications cables to the connectors.
Note For connecting of the DeviceNet Communications Card of the Inverter, use DCA1-5C10 Thin
Cables.
Thick Cables cannot be used for this kind of wiring because of the terminal block dimensions.
1. Remove about 30 mm of the cable covering, being careful not to damage the shield weaving under-
neath. Do not remove more than about 30 mm; removing too much of the covering can result in short
circuits.
About 30 mm
2. Carefully peel back the weaving to reveal the signal lines, power lines, and the shielding wire. The
shielding wire will be loose on the outside of the other lines, but it is harder than the weaving.
Shielding wire
3-7
3. Remove the exposed weaving and the aluminum tape from the signal and power lines. Strip the
covering from the signal and power lines to the proper length for the crimp terminals. Twist together
the wires of each of the signal and power lines.
Strip to match the crimp terminals
S Inverter Internal Wiring

Keep the DeviceNet wiring separated from the main circuit wiring as much as possible. Do not wire them
together.
3G3RV/3G3PV Inverters of 18.5 kW or Less 3G3RV/3G3PV Inverters of 22 kW or More
3G3FV Inverters of 15 kW or Less 3G3FV Inverters of 18.5 kW or More
Side panel of Inverter DeviceNet

DeviceNet Operator
communications Communications
line wiring Card
Pass the DeviceNet

communications line
wiring by breaking off
this portion.
Control wiring Main circuit wiring
Do not bundle the control wiring and

main circuit wiring together.
S DeviceNet Communications Card Crimp Terminal

To further improve the reliability and ease of wiring, use the following straight crimp terminal when wiring
the communications cable to the terminal block of the DeviceNet Communications Card.
1.0 dia.
Model: A1 0.5–8 WH (by Phoenix Contact)
Unit: mm
2.6 dia.
S DeviceNet Communications Card Terminal Block Wiring Procedure

1. Loosen the terminal screws using a thin flat-blade screwdriver.
3-8
2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block.
3. Tighten the terminal screws securely to a torque of 0.5 N@m.
Note 1. Separate the DeviceNet communications cables from the main circuit wiring and other power
lines.
Note 2. Do not solder the ends of the electric wires. Doing so may cause contact failure.
Note 3. If straight crimp terminals are not used, strip the electrical wires to a length of 5.5 mm.
Note 4. Do not tighten the screws to a torque exceeding 0.5 N@m. Doing so may damage the terminal
block. If the screws are too loose, however, malfunctions or short circuits may result.
Thin flat-blade screwdriver
Terminal block (TC)
Strip to 5.5 mm
(if straight crimp
terminal is not
used).
Wire Straight crimp terminal
or unsoldered cable
Black Blue White Red
S Connecting Communications Cables to T-branch Taps

For connecting the DeviceNet Communications Card, use DCA1-5C10 Thin Cables and branch them
from the T-branch Tap. This is done for reasons of terminal block dimensions and easy maintenance.
Note 1. Thick Cables cannot be used for this wiring.

Note 2. As for multi-drop wiring, use Thin Cables for direct insertion.
This section shows how to connect a communications cable with a connector attached to a T-branch
Tap. There are two kinds of T-branch Taps, one makes a single branch and the other makes three
branches, but the cable connections are the same for both.
The connectors indicated by asterisks in the following diagrams have the least resistance and these
connectors should be used for the trunk line connections. When using a T-branch Tap on a drop line,
connect the longest drop line to these connectors.
3-9
D DCN1-1C T-branch Tap
* Use for trunk line of
longest drop line.
D DCN1-3C T-branch Tap

* Use for trunk line of
longest drop line.
D T-branch Tap Connectors

The required number of connectors (on cable side) for T-branch Taps are supplied with the product.
Name COMBICON Plug with Screw Flange
Model MSTBP 2515-STF-5.08 AB AU SO
Manufacturer Phoenix Contact
Align the cable connector with the socket on the T-branch Tap as shown in the following diagram and
fully insert the connector into the socket. Tighten the set screws to secure the connection. Tighten the
screws to a torque of 0.3 N@m.
Note To avoid damaging the cable or breaking wires, do not pull on the cable or bend it too sharply when
connecting it to the T-branch Tap. Also, never place heavy objects on top of the cable.
3-10
S Connecting Terminating Resistors

Terminating resistors must be connected at each end of the trunk line. Use the methods described here
to connect the Terminating Resistors.
D T-branch Tap Terminating Resistor

A Terminating Resistor is included with the T-branch Tap. Insert the Terminating Resistor into the T-
branch Tap as shown in the following diagram. The Terminating Resistor can face in either direction.
D Terminal-block Terminating Resistor

21 max.
20
41 max. 20 max.
A Terminating Resistor is built into the Terminal-block Terminating Resistor. To connect the cable to the
Terminating Resistor, attach standard M3 crimp terminals to the signal wires and securely screw the
terminals to the Terminal-block Terminating Resistor. Tighten to a torque of 0.5 N@m.
6.0 mm max. 6.0 mm max.
Note To avoid damaging the cable or breaking wires, do not pull on the cable or bend it too sharply when
connecting it to the terminal block. Also, never place heavy objects on top of the cable.
3-11
4
Chapter 4
DeviceNet System
Startup
4-1 SYSMAC Word Allocations and Scan List
4-2 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings
4-3 Startup Procedure
DeviceNet System Startup Chapter 4
4-1 SYSMAC Word Allocations and Scan List
In a DeviceNet Network, remote I/O and message communications can be used simultaneously. This
section describes remote I/O communications, particularly the memory words allocated in the SYS-
MAC PC that correspond to the remote I/O of the Slaves.
4-1-1 Overview and Restrictions of Word Allocations
S Fixed Allocation: Without Configurator

If a Configurator is not used, default word allocations are used in the DeviceNet Master Unit. The remote
I/O is allocated in the order of DeviceNet node addresses and the words are divided into output areas
and input areas. The word allocation default settings of the Master Unit are set based on the assumption
that one node should occupy one input word and one output word. Output words will be allocated even
to Units that are used only for input.
For Units that require two input words or two output words, the node addresses to which the second
word is normally allocated cannot be set. If it is set, the word allocations will overlap.
D Allocation Areas for CS1W-DRM21 or CJ1W-DRM21 Master Units

CS/CJ-series PC
CIO 3200 CIO 3200 Node 0

Output CIO 3201 Node 1
area To Slaves
CIO 3263 Node 63

Input CIO 3301 Node 1
area From Slaves
CIO 3363 Node 63

area To Slaves
CIO 3463 Node 63
Select one of these.

area From Slaves
CIO 3563 Node 63

area To Slaves
CIO 3663 Node 63

area From Slaves
CIO 3763 Node 63
4-2
D Allocation Areas for CVM1-DRM21-V1 Master Unit
CVM1 or CV-series PC

area To Slaves
CIO 1963 Node 63

area From Slaves
CIO 2063 Node 63
D Allocation Areas for C200HW-DRM21-V1 Master Unit

CS-series or C200HX/HG/HE PC
CIO/IR 50 IR 50 Node 0
Output IR 51 Node 1
area To Slaves
IR 99 Node 49

Input IR 351 Node 1
area From Slaves
IR 399 Node 49
C200HS PC
IR 50 IR 50 Node 0
Output IR 51 Node 1
area To Slaves
IR 81 IR 80 Node 30
IR 81 Node 31
IR 350 IR 350 Node 0

Input IR 351 Node 1
area From Slaves
IR 381 IR 380 Node 30
IR 381 Node 31
Each node address is allocated one input and one output word starting from node 00. If a Slave requires
more than one input or one output word, then it is assigned more than one node address. If a Slave
requires less than one word, it simply uses the rightmost bits in the word allocated to it.
S Free Allocation: With Allocated DM Area Words

When using a CS/CJ-series Master Unit (CS1W-DRM21/CJ1W-DRM21), it is possible to allocate any
area to slaves using the allocated DM Area words. Set the following data in the Master User Allocations
Table, and then turn ON the Master User Allocations Switch to execute allocation.
1. The area (i.e., CIO, DM, etc.) and first word of the OUT 1 block allocated to DeviceNet remote I/O
2. The area and first word of the IN 1 block allocated to DeviceNet remote I/O
3. The area and the first word of the Allocation Size Setup Table, which indicates the words allocated to
each DeviceNet slave.
Free allocation using the allocated DM Area words enables the following.
4-3
Free allocation is possible without using a Configurator.
Output words do not need to be allocated to Input Units, only input words.
Slaves that require two words can be allocated two words using only one node address so that the
next node addresses can be set for another Slave.
Free allocation using the allocated DM Area words differs from free allocation using the Configurator in
the following ways.
Words can be allocated in order of node address only. Allocation is not possible in any other order.
Two blocks are used for setting, 1 OUT block and 1 IN block. Allocation is not possible using 4
blocks. (Size of 1 block = 500 words max.)
The leftmost byte cannot be allocated to slaves with less than 16 points.
CPU Unit
Set with allocated

DM Area words
Address Addresses in ascending

Output order starting from 0
(OUT) To Slaves
block 1
Address
Address Addresses in ascending

Input order starting from 0
(IN) From Slaves
block 1
Address
At least one byte (rightmost) is allocated to each address.

For slaves with more than 16 inputs or outputs, more than one input or output word is allocated to
that slave’s node address.
The rightmost byte is allocated to slaves with less than 16 inputs or outputs.
S Free Allocation: With Configurator

A Configurator can be used to allocate words in the DeviceNet Master Unit in any order by calling pa-
rameters of the Master Unit and changing the word allocation of parameters. The following allocations
are possible when using a Configurator.
• Output words do not need to be allocated to Input Units, only input words.
• Slaves that require two words can be allocated two words using only one node address so that the next
node addresses can be set for another Slave.
• Remote I/O words can be allocated in sequence regardless of the order of the node addresses.
Note The Configurator uses one node address. Therefore, the number of Slaves that can be connected
is reduced if the Network is to be operated with the Configurator still connected. The Configurator
can be removed, however, after the words have been allocated, and then another Slave can be
4-4
connected to the Network in its place so that the number of Slaves that can be connected is not
reduced.
Blocks can be positioned in any order in memory,

e.g., the following order is okay: input block 1, out-
put block 2, input block 2, output block 1.
CPU Unit
Address
Output area
Output To Slaves
block 1 Address
Output Address
block 2
Address Addresses can be as-
Input area
signed in any order
Input Address
block 1
Input Address From Slaves

block 2
Address
Address
Words are freely allocated to the Slaves and I/O blocks can be set as desired. Each node must be allo-
cated at least one byte (leftmost or rightmost). If a Slave requires more than one input or one output
word, then it can be allocated more than one input or output word. If a Slave requires less than one word,
it will use either the rightmost or leftmost bits in the word allocated to it.
D Free Allocation Restrictions

The following restrictions apply when freely allocating remote I/O.
• The remote I/O allocated to one Slave cannot be separated, i.e., all input words must be consecutive,
as must all output words. Inputs and outputs, however, can be separated.
• With a Slave requiring more than one word, a series of allocations cannot be started from the leftmost
byte of the remote I/O. The leftmost byte, however, can be allocated to a Slave requiring only 8 bits.
• Multiple words cannot be allocated as the remote I/O for a single Slave.
• A Slave cannot be assigned to more than one Master Unit.
4-1-2 Scan List

A scan list is used to register the Slaves with which the Master Unit communicates in DeviceNet remote
I/O communications. It is the basis on which the Master Unit communicates with Slaves.
The Master Unit does not contain a scan list by default. The CS/CJ-series DeviceNet Unit, however, has
a default setting that allows it to communicate with all Slaves even with the scan list disabled (scan list
disabled mode), but this operating mode should not be used for normal operation. Always create a scan
list prior to operating the Unit.
D Scan List Contents

The contents of the scan list are given in the following table. When a Master Unit goes online, it
compares each of these items with the Slaves that are actually connected to the network. The items that
are compared, however, will depend on the allocation method that is used.
4-5
Item Description Fixed allocations Free allocations Free allocations

using allocated using Configurator
DM Area words
Node address Node address for Compared Compared
every Slave
Allocated IN/OUT Settings for the Compared Compared
sizes and number of bytes
allocation area allocated to the Master
Unit and in which area
Vendor Unique manufacturer Not compared Set using Configurator
ID
Device type Unit product type Not compared Set using Configurator
value
Product code Unique product model Not compared Set using Configurator
value
Connection type Applicable DeviceNet Automatically set Automatically set or
protocol set using Configurator
Connection path Type of Slave I/O data Cannot be set Set using Configurator
Note With CVM1-DRM21-V1/C200HW-DRM21-V1 Master Units, only node addresses, allocated IN/
OUT sizes, and allocated areas are registered in the scan list.
D Creating the Scan List

The way that a scan list is prepared varies with the allocation method as shown below.
Fixed allocations Free allocations using allocated Free allocations using Configu-
DM Area words rator
With the CPU Unit in PROGRAM With the CPU Unit in PROGRAM Create a list from the Configurator.
mode: mode, turn ON the Master User (Obtain a list of online devices,
1. Turn ON a Master Fixed Allocations Setup Switch. use it to create a scan list, and
Allocation Setting Switch (1 to then register the scan list in the
3). Master Unit.)
2. Turn ON the Scan List Enable
Switch.
Note 1. Be sure to create a scan list before starting actual system operation.
Note 2. With fixed allocations, it is possible to communicate with Slaves without creating a scan list
(scan list disabled mode). Operating without a scan list, however, may result in faulty opera-
tion because the Master Unit will communicate with Slaves even if they do not start up (due to
equipment failure, for example).
S Scan List Enabled Mode and Scan List Disabled Mode

A scan list must be created. The scan list modes are explained below.
D Scan List Enabled Mode (Used for Actual Operation)

Remote I/O communications are performed according to the registered scan list and only with slaves
that are on the list. A verification error occurs if a slave registered on the scan list is not present on the
network, if a slave did not start up when remote I/O communications started, or is the number of I/O
points did not match the number registered.
4-6
D Scan List Disabled Mode (Used When Changing the System Configuration)
In this mode, remote I/O communications (fixed allocations) are performed without a scan list created
(or with the scan list cleared). This mode is used when the scan list is temporarily cleared in order to
change the system configuration. Do not perform actual system operation without a scan list. Use this
mode only to replace a Master Unit or change the system configuration (change a connected Slave or
node address).
Note 1. To enter Scan List Disabled Mode, turn ON the Scan List Clear Switch during remote I/O com-
munications with the scan list enabled (with fixed allocations, free allocations using the allo-
cated DM Area words, or free allocations using the Configurator). Remote I/O communica-
tions will be executed using fixed allocations.
Note 2. In Scan List Disabled Mode, all Slaves are targeted for remote I/O communications. Slaves
that are connected to the network while communications are in progress are also targeted for
communications. Errors cannot be confirmed, however, even if there are slaves present that
did not start up (due to equipment failure, for example) because there is no scan list available
to check communications against. The communications cycle time will also be significantly
longer than the calculated value.
Note 3. The scan list is automatically enabled when free allocations are set using the allocated DM
Area words or the Configurator. If the list is subsequently cleared using a software switch, the
fixed allocations that were used when the list was disabled will be used for remote I/O commu-
nications. Make sure the system has stopped before disabling the scan list with a Master Unit
that is set for free allocations. In particular, when multiple Master Units are connected to a
single network, communications will not be performed normally if one Master Unit on the net-
work is operating with the scan list disabled. Also, once the list is disabled, the free allocations
data registered in the Master Unit is lost.
4-1-3 Fixed Word Allocations
S Allocation Areas for Different PCs

If fixed allocations are used, the node addresses and the words allocated to them are determined ac-
cording to the PC or Master Unit used. The remote I/O allocation area consists of the input area that
receives input from the Slaves, and the output area that writes output data to the Slaves.
4-7
D Allocations for CS1W-DRM21 and CJ1W-DRM21 Master Units
Node SYSMAC CS/CJ-series Programmable Controllers
dd
address Fixed allocation area 1 Fixed allocation area 2 Fixed allocation area 3
Output area Input area Output area Input area Output area Input area
(CIO 3200 to (CIO 3300 to (CIO3400 to (CIO 3500 to (CIO 3600 to (CIO 3700 to
CIO 3263) CIO 3363) CIO 3463) CIO 3563) CIO 3663) CIO 3763)
0 CIO 3200 CIO 3300 CIO 3400 CIO 3500 CIO 3600 CIO 3700
... ... ... ... ... ... ...
... ... ... ... ... --- ---
... ... ... --- --- --- ---
Note 1. The fixed allocation area (1, 2, or 3) is selected using a software switch in the area allocated to
the Master Unit.
Note 2. The words corresponding to the node address of the Master Unit are not actually used by the
Master Unit, so they can be used by other Slaves. The actual node address of the Master Unit,
however, cannot be the same as the node address of another Slave.
Note 3. When Slaves made by other companies are used that are for either output only or input only,
both the output area and the input area may be used depending on the status information.
Therefore, be sure to check the specifications of the Slave before using any word allocated to
a Slave.
4-8
D Allocations for CVM1-DRM21-V1 and C200HW-DRM21-V1 Master Units
Node SYSMAC Programmable Controllers
address
dd CV-series PCs C200HX/HG/HE PCs C200HS PCs
Output area Input area Output area Input area Output area Input area
(CIO 1900 to (CIO 2000 to (IR 50 to (IR 350 to (IR 50 to (IR 350 to
CIO 1963) CIO 2063) IR 99) IR 399) IR 81) IR 381)
0 CIO 1900 CIO 2000 IR 50 IR 350 IR 50 IR 350
1 CIO 1901 CIO 2001 IR 51 IR 351 IR 51 IR 351
2 CIO 1902 CIO 2002 IR 52 IR 352 IR 52 IR 352
... ... ... ... ... ... ...
30 CIO 1930 CIO 2030 IR 80 IR 380 IR 80 IR 380
31 CIO 1931 CIO 2031 IR 81 IR 381 IR 81 IR 381
32 CIO 1932 CIO 2032 IR 82 IR 382 --- ---
... ... ... ... ... --- ---
48 CIO 1948 CIO 2048 IR 98 IR 398 --- ---
49 CIO 1949 CIO 2049 IR 99 IR 399 --- ---
50 CIO 1950 CIO 2050 --- --- --- ---
... ... ... --- --- --- ---
62 CIO 1962 CIO 2062 --- --- --- ---
63 CIO 1963 CIO 2063 --- --- --- ---
Note 1. The words corresponding to the node address of the Master Unit are not actually used by the
Master Unit, so they can be used by other Slaves. The actual node address of the Master Unit,
however, cannot be the same as the node address of another Slave.
Note 2. When Slaves made by other companies are used that are for either output only or input only,
both the output area and the input area may be used depending on the status information.
Therefore, be sure to check the specifications of the Slave before using any word allocated to
a Slave.
S Procedure
D CS1W-DRM21 or CJ1W-DRM21 Master Units

Fixed allocation is executed using the software switches in the area allocated to the Master Unit,
according to the following procedure.
1. Put the CPU Unit in PROGRAM mode.

Allocation cannot be executed if the CPU Unit is not in PROGRAM mode. Be sure to put the CPU
Unit in PROGRAM mode.
2. Turn ON the Master Enable Switch.
It is possible to set CS1W-DRM21 or CJ1W-DRM21 Master Units to function as Slave Units. Enable
the Master Unit functionality by turning ON the Master Enable Switch.
3. Turn ON the Scan List Clear Switch.
Disable any scan list that has been created. When the scan list is cleared, all scan list data is lost and
so make a backup copy if required.
4. Select fixed allocation area.
Select fixed allocation area 1, 2, or 3.
4-9
5. Turn ON the Scan List Enable Switch.
The Master Unit will create and store a scan list based on information from all the Slaves currently
participating in the network and operate with this scan list enabled. Slaves that are not participating
in the network when this Switch is turned ON are not registered and so check that all the necessary
Slaves are participating.
Note If the Master Enable Switch is turned ON when the master function is enabled, or Scan List Clear
Switch is turned ON when the scan list is disabled, a C2 error will be generated to indicate a soft-
ware setting error.
D CVM1-DRM21-V1 or C200HW-DRM21-V1 Master Units

Fixed allocation is executed using the software switches in the area allocated to the Master Unit,
according to the following procedure.
1. Put the CPU Unit in PROGRAM mode.
Allocation cannot be executed if the CPU Unit is not in PROGRAM mode. Be sure to put the CPU
Unit in PROGRAM mode.
2. Turn ON the Scan List Clear Switch.
Disable any scan list that has been created. When the scan list is cleared, all scan list data is lost and
so make a backup copy if required.
3. Turn ON the Scan List Enable Switch.
The Master Unit will create and store a scan list based on information from all the Slaves currently
participating in the network and operate with this scan list enabled. Slaves that are not participating
in the network when this Switch is turned ON are not registered and so check that all the necessary
Slaves are participating.
S I/O Allocations and Errors

A setup error may occur when the scan list is disabled or a verification error may occur when the scan list
is enabled if I/O allocations are not correct.
D Setup Error: I/O Area Overlap

A setup error (I/O Area Overlap) will occur and it will not be possible to start DeviceNet communications
if the same word is used by more than one Slave connected to a SYSMAC Master Unit. This error will
occur only when the scan list is disabled.
To eliminate the I/O area overlap and clear this error, change the node address setting on one of the
Slaves and restart the Master Unit by turning ON the power again or restarting.
D Setup Error: I/O Area Range Violation

A setup error (I/O Area Range Violation) will occur and it will not be possible to start DeviceNet commu-
nications if node addresses are set at values that exceed the specified range, or if Slaves that use multi-
ple words are using more words than are specified in the I/O area. This error will occur only when the
scan list is disabled.
To eliminate the above problems and clear this error, change the node address setting on the Slaves
and restart the Master Unit by turning ON the power again or restarting.
D Verification Error: Slave I/O Size Differs

With the scan list enabled, if there are differences between the information in the scan list and the
information from Slaves actually participating in the network, a verification error will occur and it will not
4-10
be possible to start DeviceNet communications. This error will occur only when the scan list is enabled.
To eliminate and clear this error, either create the scan list again or restore the network configuration
corresponding to the scan list.
S Fixed Allocation Example

Node Output Input Output area Input area
address points points
Allocation not possible CIO 3300 Allocation Allocated
0 0 8 CIO 3200 not possible
Allocation Allocated CIO 3301
1 8 0 CIO 3201 not possible Allocation not possible
2 0 16 CIO 3202 Allocation not possible CIO 3302 Allocated
3 16 0 CIO 3203 Allocated CIO 3303 Allocation not possible
Allocation Allocated Allocation Allocated

4 8 8 CIO 3204 not possible CIO 3304 not possible
5 16 16 CIO 3205 Allocated CIO 3305 Allocated
6 0 ... 48 CIO 3206 Allocation not possible CIO 3306 Allocated
7 . . . Master Unit (see note 2) CIO 3207 Allocation possible CIO 3307 Allocated
Allocated CIO 3308 Allocated

8 32 . . . 0 CIO 3208
9 . . . (see note 3) CIO 3209 Allocated CIO 3309 Allocation possible
Allocated CIO 3310 Allocated

10 CIO 3210
11 32 . . . 32 Allocated CIO 3311 Allocated
CIO 3211
12 None None CIO 3212 Not used CIO 3312 Not used
63 None None CIO 3263 Not used CIO 3363 Not used
Note 1. The above example is for allocations in a CS/CJ-series PC.

Note 2. The Master Unit is not allocated any words, so any available node address can be used as
node address 7.
Note 3. Slaves can be allocated to the words labeled “Allocation possible” as long as the same words
are not allocated to more than one Slave.
S Basic Application Procedure

1. Set the initial settings for the Master Unit:
CS1W-DRM21 or CJ1W-DRM21
Unit number (“UNIT No.” switch on front panel)
Node address (node address switches on front panel)
Baud rate (front panel DIP switch pins 1 and 2)
Communications continue/stop setting for communications error (front panel DIP switch pin 3)
Hold/clear remote output setting for communications error (front panel DIP switch pin 4)
CVM1-DRM21-V1
Node address (back panel DIP switch pins 1 to 6)
Communications continue/stop setting for communications error (front panel switch pin 3)
4-11
C200HW-DRM21-V1
Unit number (“MACHINE No.” switch on front panel)
2. Set the initial settings for the Slaves:
Node address (DIP switch)
Baud rate (DIP switch)
Etc.
3. Mount the Master Unit and wire the Network.
For CV-series PCs, Master Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion CPU Rack. Only
one Master Unit can be mounted.
For CS-series and C200HX/HG/HE PCs, Master Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expan-
sion I/O Rack. Only one Master Unit can be mounted.
For C200HS PCs, Master Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion I/O Rack. Only one
Master Unit can mounted.
4. Connect a Programming Device to the PC and turn ON the power supply to the PC.
5. Generate the I/O table.
6. Turn ON the power supply to the Slaves and turn ON the communications power supply.
7. Switch the PC to PROGRAM mode. (See note 1.)
8. Perform the following and go to step 11. if the scan list was disabled at startup. Otherwise, go to step
9.
a) Turn ON a Fixed Allocation Switch (1 to 3). (See note 2.)
b) Confirm that communications are possible with the registered slaves by monitoring the Regis-
tered Slave Data Area.
c) From a Programming Device connected to the PC, turn ON the Scan List Enable Bit in the soft-
ware switches (bit 0).
Remote I/O communications will start with the scan list enabled. The software switches can be used
to start and stop remote I/O communications.
9. Perform the following from the Programming Device connected to the PC and go to step 11. if the
scan list was enabled at startup and you want to re-register the scan list. Otherwise, go to step 10.
a) Turn ON the Scan List Clear Bit in the software switches (bit 1).
b) Turn ON a Fixed Allocation Switch (1 to 3). (See note 2.)
c) Confirm that communications are possible with the registered slaves by monitoring the Regis-
tered Slave Data Area.
d) Turn ON the Scan List Enable Bit in the software switches (bit 0).
to start and stop remote I/O communications.
10. Do nothing if the scan list was enabled at startup and the scan list does not need to be changed.
to start and stop remote I/O communications. Go to step 11.
4-12
11. Confirm that the MS and NS indicators on all Master Units and Slaves are lit.
12. Switch the PC to RUN mode.
Note 1. With the CS1W-DRM21 or CJ1W-DRM21, if the slave function is being used, switch to the
master function by turning ON the Master Enable Switch.
Note 2. This operation is not required with the CVM1-DRM21-V1 or C200HW-DRM21-V1 because
there is only one fixed allocation area.
4-1-4 Free Allocations
S Allocation Areas and Maximum Words for Different PCs and Master
Units
When free allocations are used, the remote I/O areas consist of IN blocks, which input Slave data to the
PC, and OUT blocks, which output data from the PC to the Slaves. These blocks can be allocated as
desired using the following words. Each block, however, must consist of continuous words within one
data area.
D CS1W-DRM21 and CJ1W-DRM21 Master Units

PC CS/CJ Series (all models)
Setting method Set using allocated DM Area Set using Configurator
words (See note 1.)
Words that can be allocated CIO: 0000 to 6143
WR: W000 to W511
HR: HR000 to HR511
DM: D00000 to D32767
EM: E00000 to E32767 (Banks 0 to C)
Maximum number of words 1 block: 500 words max. 1 block: 500 words max.
OUT 1 and IN 1 can be created OUT 1, IN 1, OUT 2, and IN 2 can
anywhere in the above areas. be created anywhere in the above
(Maximum: 1,000 words) areas.
(Maximum: 2,000 words)
Note 1. Free allocation using allocated DM Area words is only possible with the CS1W-DRM21 or
CJ1W-DRM21. To perform free allocation with other Master Units, use the Configurator.
Note 2. The Data Memory (DM) Area cannot manipulated by bit, so it is not suitable as the remote I/O
allocation area for the Inverter.
4-13
D CVM1-DRM21-V1 and C200HW-DRM21-V1 Master Units
PC SYSMAC Programmable Controllers
CV-series PCs CS1-series C200HX/HG/HE PCs C200HS PCs
CV500/ All other PC
PCs C200HE-CPU11- All other ( ll models)
(all d l )
CVM1-CPU01- models (all models) E models
E
Words CIO 0000 to CIO 0000 CIO 000 to IR 000 to IR 235, IR 300 to IR IR 000 to
that can CIO 2427 to CIO 235, 511 IR 235, IR 300
be CIO 2555 CIO 300 to to IR 511
allocated CIO 511
G008 to G255 HR 000 to HR 00 to HR 99 HR 00 to HR
H099, LR 00 to LR 63 99
CIO 1000 to LR 00 to LR
CIO 1063 63
D00000 to D00000 to D00000 to DM 0000 to DM 0000 DM 0000 to
D08191 D24575 D05999 DM 4095 to DM 5999
DM 5999
Max. No. Each block can be up to Each block can be up to 100 words (including The total
of words 100 words (including unused unused areas). number of
areas). The total number of words in all four blocks words in all
The total number of words in must be 300 words or less (including unused four blocks
all four blocks must be 400 areas). must be 80
words or less. words or less
If message communications are used, the (including
total number of words in all four blocks must unused
be 100 words or less. areas).
Note 1. The Data Memory (DM) Area cannot manipulated by bit, so it is not suitable as the remote I/O
allocation area for the Inverter.
Note 2. If a CPU Bus Link is used with a CV-series PC, the G Area is used for the CPU Bus Link, mak-
ing it impossible to use this area for DeviceNet communications.
Output area Input area

Start word Input block 1 Start word
Output block 1
No. of words No. of words

allocated (“oc- allocated (“oc-
cupied”) cupied”)
Start word Start word

Output block 2 Input block 2
No. of words No. of words

allocated (“oc- allocated (“oc-
cupied”) cupied”)
Note 1. OUT 1 and IN 1 can be set using the allocated DM Area words. For each block, set the area,
the start word, and the number of words allocated to each Slave.
Note 2. OUT 1, IN 1, OUT 2, and IN 2 can be set using a Configurator. For each block, set the area, the
start word, the number of words allocated to the block, and the number of words allocated to
each Slave.
4-14
S Free Allocation Restrictions

• Each node address can be set only once in the output blocks and once in the input blocks.
The same node ad-

dress cannot be set
twice. Output block 1 Output block 2
Node 02 Node 02
WRONG
• If a Configurator is used to freely allocate words or bytes to each Slave, only a Slave using only one
byte (8 bits) can be set in the leftmost byte of the allocated word. Slaves with more than 8 bits cannot be
set for the leftmost bit of the allocated word.
Start byte
Only one byte can be set 15 0
if the first byte is a left-
most byte.
WRONG
• The same Slave cannot be allocated words in more than one Master.
Master Master
Words must be allocated to a

Slave from one Master only.
WRONG
Slave
Note The master parameter file duplication check from the Configurator can be used to check for node
addresses that have been set more than once in the scan list, which shows the I/O allocations that
have been made.
• Always use the Configurator when there is more than one Master and enable the scan lists. A Bus OFF
error can occur if there is more than one Master with the scan list disabled on the same Network.
S Free Allocation Restrictions When Using Allocated DM Area Words

• Allocation in Order of Node Address
When using allocated DM Area words, words are allocated in order of node address. It is possible not
to allocated words to a node address but the order cannot be changed.
• Only OUT 1 and IN 1 Can Be Used
When using allocated DM Area words, only two blocks (OUT 1 and IN 1) can be allocated. Four blocks
can be allocated using the Configurator.
• Slaves of 1 Byte or Less Can Not Be Allocated to the Leftmost Byte
With the Configurator, Slaves requiring one byte or less can be allocated the leftmost byte of a word,
but this is not possible when using allocated DM Area words.
4-15
S Example of Free Allocations (Using the Configurator)

Output area Input area
Node Output Input

Output block 1 Input block 1
0 16 0 CIO 1950 Allocated (00) CIO 1900 Allocated (02)
1 8 8 CIO 1951 Allocated (01) CIO 1901 Allocated (01) Allocated (03)
Not used
2 16 16 CIO 1952 Allocated (02)
3 0 8 CIO 1953 Allocated (10)
10 32 0 CIO 1954 Allocated (10)
Node Output Input Input block 2

Output block 2
4 0 48 CIO 2000 Not used Allocated (12) CIO 0010 Allocated (04)
CIO 0011 Allocated (04)

9 0 8
12 8 16
CIO 0013 Not used
CIO 0015 Not used Allocated (09)
Note 1. The above example is for a CS/CJ-series PC using the Configurator.

Note 2. When using allocated DM Area words, output block 2 and input block 2 cannot be set. Also, it
is not possible to allocate only the leftmost byte of a word (as with node address 01 in the
above example).
S Basic Application Procedure

1. Set the initial settings for the Master Unit:
CS1W-DRM21 or CJ1W-DRM21
Node address (node address switches on front panel)
Communications continue/stop setting for communications error (front panel DIP switch pin 3)
Hold/clear remote output setting for communications error (front panel DIP switch pin 4)
CVM1-DRM21-V1
C200HW-DRM21-V1
Unit number (“MACHINE No.” switch on front panel)
2. Set the initial settings for the Slaves:
Node address (DIP switch)
Baud rate (DIP switch)
Etc.
4-16
3. Mount the Master Unit and wire the Network.
For CV-series PCs, Master Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion CPU Rack. Up to
16 Master Units can be mounted.
For C200HX/HG/HE PCs, Master Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion I/O Rack.
Up to 10 or 16 Master Units can be mounted.
For C200HS PCs, Master Units can be mounted to the CPU Rack or Expansion I/O Rack. Up to 10
Master Units can be mounted.
4. Connect a Programming Device to the PC and turn ON the power supply to the PC.
5. Generate the I/O table.
6. Turn OFF the power to the PC.
7. Go to step 8. if only one Master Unit is being used. Go to step 15. if more than one Master Unit is
being used in the same Network. Go to step 29. if allocated DM Area words are used for allocations.
8. Connect a Configurator to the Network.
9. Turn ON the power supply to all nodes.
10. Switch the PC to PROGRAM mode. (See note.)
11. Get the device list and create the master parameters with the Configurator.
12. If more than one Master Unit is mounted to the same PC, use the Configurator to check for duplica-
tion in the master parameter settings.
13. Register the master parameters in the Master Unit(s).
14. Go to step 32.
15. Connect a Configurator to the Network.
16. Turn ON the power supply to all the Slaves.
17. Read the Network configuration from the Configurator. (See note.)
18. Turn OFF the power supply to all the Slaves.
19. Create the master parameters for each Master Unit and save the parameters in files.
20. Turn ON the power supply to one PC (i.e., to one of the Master Units).
21. Switch the PC to PROGRAM mode.
22. Read the Network configuration from the Configurator.
23. Read the master parameter file for the Master Unit that has been turned ON from the master param-
eter editing screen.
24. Write the master parameters created in the above step 19.
25. Turn OFF the power supply to the PC (i.e., the Master Unit) and the Slaves.
26. Repeat the above steps beginning at step 20. for all Master Units.
27. Turn ON the power supply to all Masters and Slaves.
28. Go to step 32.
29. Switch the PC to PROGRAM mode. (See note.)
30. Set the Master User Allocations Tables for the allocated DM Area words in each Master Unit.
31. Turn ON the Master User Allocations Switch for each Master Unit.
32. Remote I/O communications will start with the scan list enabled. (Communications will not start if
they have been set to be stopped at startup from the Configurator.) Use the software switches or
Configurator to start and stop remote I/O communications.
4-17
33. Confirm that the MS and NS indicators on all Master Units and Slaves are lit.
34. Read the Network configuration from the Configurator.
35. Save the Network configuration in a file from the Configurator.
36. Switch the PC to RUN mode.
Note With the CS1W-DRM21 or CJ1W-DRM21, if the slave function is being used, switch to the master
function by turning ON the Master Enable Switch.
4-18
4-2 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings
4-2-1 3G3RV and 3G3PV Inverters

In order to perform DeviceNet communications, it is necessary to make settings for the Inverter accord-
ing to the application.
Note The parameters set here are applied to the DeviceNet Communications Card when the power is
turned ON. Turn OFF the power after changing parameters and turn ON again to apply them.
S Frequency Reference Selection

• Select the method for inputting frequency references to the Inverter. Select the method suitable for the
application.
Parameter Set value Contents Default setting
No.
b1-01 0 Digital Operator Value set in d1-01 used. 1
1 Control circuit Set using analog input from control
terminals circuit terminals.
2 RS-422/485 Set via RS-422/485
communications communications.
3 Optional Card Set using DeviceNet
Communications Card.
4 Pulse input Set using pulse input from control
circuit terminals.
Note Pulse input is not available with 3G3PV Inverters and so this setting is not possible.
• When frequency references from the DeviceNet communications are to be always used, set to “3.” If
this setting is performed, frequency reference 1 can only be set through DeviceNet communications.
However, parameter values set from DeviceNet communications or the Digital Operator are used for
3G3RV Inverters’ frequency references 2 to 16 and inching frequency reference and 3G3PV Invert-
ers’ frequency references 2 to 4 and inching frequency reference (d1-02 to d1-17) regardless of the
setting of b1-01.
D Switching of Frequency References from DeviceNet Communications

• There is a switching signal, “Net. Ref.,” for frequency references (speed references) from the standard
remote I/O of the DeviceNet Communications Card. The input method for frequency references can
be changed in the following ways using the “Net. Ref.” signal.
Net. Ref. = 1 (ON): Automatically sets b1-01 to “3,” making frequency references from DeviceNet
communications valid (remote I/O frequency references become valid). If Net. Ref. turns OFF,
b1-01 will return to the original value.
Net. Ref. = 0 (OFF): The frequency reference specified by b1-01 becomes valid.
S Inverter Operation Command Selection

• Select the method for inputting Run and Stop Commands to the Inverter. Select the method suitable
for the application.
4-19

No.
b1-02 0 Digital Operator RUN and STOP Keys on the Digital 1
Operator
1 Control circuit Operation command input from
terminals control circuit terminals
2 RS-422/485 Operation commands received via
communications RS-422A/485 communications
3 Optional Card Operation commands using
• When operation commands (forward, reverse, stop) from the DeviceNet communications are to be
always used, set to “3.”
D Switching of Operation Commands from DeviceNet Communications

• There is a switching signal, “Net. Ctrl.,” for operation commands from the standard remote I/O of the
DeviceNet Communications Card. The input method for operation commands can be changed in the
following ways using the “Net. Ctrl.” signal.
Net. Ctrl. = 1 (ON): Automatically sets b1-02 to “3,” making frequency references from DeviceNet
communications valid (remote I/O frequency references become valid). If Net. Ctrl. turns OFF,
Net. Ctrl. = 0 (OFF): The frequency reference specified by b1-02 becomes valid.
S DeviceNet Communications Settings

The parameters below are for functions that are exclusive to DeviceNet communications. Set these
parameters according to the desired application.
4-20
Parameter Name Contents Setting

g Default
N
No. Operator display range setting
i
F6-01 Communications fault operation Select the Inverter operation 0 to 3 1
performed when a communications
fault is detected.
0: Decelerates to a stop using
C1-02 deceleration time/fault
detection
Comm Bus Flt Sel 1: Coasts to a stop/fault detection
2: Decelerates to a stop using the
C1-09 emergency stop time/fault
detection
3: Continues operating/alarm
detection (See note 1.)
F6-02 Communications external fault Select the detection method used 0, 1 0
input: detection method for the communications external
fault input from communications
(DeviceNet Communications
Card).
EF0 Detection 0: Faults always detected.
1: Faults detected only while
running (i.e., when Run
Commands are input)
F6-03 Communications external fault Select the Inverter operation 0 to 3 1
input: operation performed when there is a
communications external fault
(EF0) input from communications
Card).
detection
EF0 Fault Action
1: Coats to a stop/fault detection
detection
detection
F6-04 Not used Do not set. --- 0
(3G3PV Inverters do not have this
Trace Sample Tim parameter.)
F6-05 Current monitor display unit Select the display unit for 0, 1 0
selection monitoring the current. Always set
this parameter to 0 when using a
DeviceNet Communications Card.
Current Unit Sel 0: A (ampere) display
1: 100%/8192
Note If F6-01 is set to 3 (continues operating), the Inverter will continue operating when a communica-
tions fault occurs according to the contents of settings immediately before. Be sure to take any
steps necessary to ensure safety, such as installing a limit switch or an emergency stop switch.
4-21
S Frequency Reference Settings and Display Units

• Perform the following settings to specify units for data related to frequencies (speeds) used in Device-
Net communications.
• The standard unit used with DeviceNet is r/min, so always set the number of motor poles.
No.
o1-o3 0 0.01 Hz 0
1 0.01% (max. frequency is 100%)
2 to 39 r/min (Set the number of motor poles.)
40 to 3,999 Specifies the value used to set and display the
maximum frequency.

Set a 4-digit value without the

decimal point.
Set the position of the digit where
the decimal point is to be displayed
starting from the rightmost digit.
Example: To display the maximum frequency as “200.0”

specify “12000.”
4-2-2 3G3FV Inverters

In order to perform DeviceNet communications, it is necessary to make settings for the Inverter accord-
ing to the application.
Note The parameters set here are applied to the DeviceNet Communications Card when the power is
turned ON. Turn OFF the power after changing parameters and turn ON again to apply them.
S Frequency Reference Selection

• Select the method for inputting frequency references to the Inverter. Select the method suitable for the
application.
No.
b1-01 0 d1-01 Value set in d1-01 used. 1
1 External Set using analog input from control
terminals circuit terminals.
2 Not used (Do not set.)
3 Optional Card Set using DeviceNet
• When frequency references from the DeviceNet communications are to be always used, set to “3.” If
this setting is performed, frequency reference 1 can only be set through DeviceNet communications.
However, parameter values set from DeviceNet communications or the Digital Operator are used for
frequency references 2 to 8 and the inching frequency reference (d1-02 to d1-09) regardless of the
setting of b1-01.
4-22
D Switching of Frequency References from DeviceNet Communications
• There is a switching signal, “Net. Ref.,” for frequency references (speed references) from the standard
remote I/O of the DeviceNet Communications Card. The input method for frequency references can
be changed in the following ways using the “Net. Ref.” signal.
Net. Ref. = 1 (ON): Automatically sets b1-01 to “3,” making frequency references from DeviceNet
communications valid (remote I/O frequency references become valid). If Net. Ref. turns OFF,
Net. Ref. = 0 (OFF): The frequency reference specified by b1-01 becomes valid.
S Inverter Operation Command Selection

• Select the method for inputting Run and Stop Commands to the Inverter. Select the method suitable
for the application.
No.
b1-02 0 Operator Operation commands from the 1
Digital Operator
1 External Control circuit terminals (sequence
terminals input)
2 Not used (Do not set.)
3 Optional Card Operation commands using
• When operation commands (forward, reverse, stop) from the DeviceNet communications are to be
always used, set to “3.”
D Switching of Operation Commands from DeviceNet Communications

• There is a switching signal, “Net. Ctrl.,” for operation commands from the standard remote I/O of the
DeviceNet Communications Card. The input method for operation commands can be changed in the
following ways using the “Net. Ctrl.” signal.
Net. Ctrl. = 1 (ON): Automatically sets b1-02 to “3,” making frequency references from DeviceNet
communications valid (remote I/O frequency references become valid). If Net. Ctrl. turns OFF,
Net. Ctrl. = 0 (OFF): The frequency reference specified by b1-02 becomes valid.
S DeviceNet Communications Settings

The parameters below are for functions that are exclusive to DeviceNet communications. Set these
parameters according to the desired application.
Parameter Name Contents Setting
g Default
N
i
F9-01 Communications external fault Select the type of input used for 0, 1 1
input: input type the communications external fault
input from communications
Card).
EF0 Selection 0: N.O. input (external fault
detected when 1)
1: N.C. input (external fault
detected when 0)
4-23
Parameter Name Contents Setting Default

F9-02 Communications external fault Select the detection method used 0, 1 0
input: detection method for the communications external
fault input from communications
Card).
EF0 Detection 0: Always detect.
1: Detect during operation (i.e.,
when operation commands are
input).
F9-03 Communications external fault Select the Inverter operation 0 to 3 1
input: operation performed when there is a
communications external fault
input from communications
Card).
detection
EF0 Fault Action
1: Coats to a stop/fault detection
detection
detection
F9-04 Not used Do not set. --- 0
Trace Sample Tim
F9-05 Torque reference/torque limit When operating in flux vector 0, 1 1
selection from communications control mode, this setting enables
or disables torque reference and
torque limit values input from
communications (DeviceNet
Communications Card).
1)
(See note 1.)
Torq Ref/Lmt Sel
0: Torque reference/torque limit
from communications disabled.
1: Torque reference/torque limit
from communications enabled.
F9-06 Communications fault operation Select the Inverter operation 0 to 3 1

performed when a communications
fault is detected.
detection
BUS Fault Sel 1: Coats to a stop/fault detection
detection
detection
4-24
Note 1. Be sure to set F9-05 when using flux vector control. If used with the default setting (1), unless
there is a torque reference/torque limit from control remote I/O, 0 will be taken as the torque
reference/torque limit, and there will be no torque output.
Note 2. If F9-06 is set to 3 (continues operating), the Inverter will continue operating when a commu-
nications fault occurs according to the contents of settings immediately before. Be sure to
take any steps necessary to ensure safety, such as installing a limit switch or an emergency
stop switch.
S Frequency Reference Settings and Display Units

• Perform the following settings to specify units for data related to frequencies (speeds) used in Device-
Net communications.
• The standard unit used with DeviceNet is r/min, so always set the number of motor poles.
No.
o1-o3 0 0.01 Hz 0
1 0.01% (max. frequency is 100%)
2 to 39 r/min (Set the number of motor poles.)
40 to 3,999 Specifies the value used to set and display the
maximum frequency.

Set a 4-digit value without the

decimal point.
Set the position of the digit where
the decimal point is to be displayed
starting from the rightmost digit.
Example: To display the maximum frequency as “200.0”

specify “12000.”
4-25
4-3 Startup Procedure

The communications system can be started from any of the nodes on the Network. The following proce-
dure gives the startup process after turning ON the power to the Inverter’s DeviceNet Communications
Card. If the startup process shown below is interrupted or stops before being completed, an error will
occur. Correct errors that occur, referring to Chapter 6 Communications Errors.
1. Turn ON the power.

2. The PWR indicator will turn ON: Power is being supplied.
3. The MS indicator will be lit red and then green: Confirming MS indicator status.
4. The NS indicator will be lit red and then green: Confirming MS indicator status.
5. The MS indicator will flash: Shows Optional Card startup processing status.
6. The MS indicator will be lit: The Optional Card is ready.
7. The NS indicator will flash: The Optional Card is connected to the Network and startup processing is
being performed.
8. The NS indicator will be lit: The Network is started.
4-26
5
Chapter 5
DeviceNet
Communications Card
Operations
5-1 Remote I/O
5-2 Switching Remote I/O Operation
5-3 Special Remote I/O Operation
5-4 Control Remote I/O Operation
5-5 Message Communications
(DeviceNet Explicit Messages)
5-6 3G3RV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances,
and Attributes
5-7 3G3PV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances,
and Attributes
5-8 3G3FV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances,
and Attributes
DeviceNet Communications Card Operations Chapter 5
! Caution Do not carelessly change Inverter’s settings. Doing so may result in injury or dam-
age to the product.
! Caution Be sure to perform the setting switch settings correctly and confirm the settings be-
fore starting operation. Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage to the
product.
5-1 Remote I/O

There are two types of DeviceNet communications: Remote I/O and message communications. There
are 4 types of remote I/O operation: Basic remote I/O, standard remote I/O, special remote I/O, and
control remote I/O. This section explains standard remote I/O operations and the types of remote I/O.
Note To use special remote I/O or control remote I/O, it is necessary to switch the remote I/O operation.
Switching the remote I/O operation involves the use of message communications, so refer to 5-2
Switching Remote I/O Operation and 5-5 Message Communications. Also, for details regarding
special remote I/O, refer to 5-3 Special Remote I/O.
5-2
5-1-1 Standard Remote I/O (Initial Setting)

The type of remote I/O operation pre-set as the initial setting for the Inverter’s DeviceNet Communica-
tions Card is standard remote I/O. This remote I/O can be used for general Inverter control.
C200HW-DRM21-V1 or
CVM1-DRM21-V1 (Master Unit)
SYSDRIVE Inverter
(3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV)
Remote I/O function

Output (PC to 3G3FV)
Wd 15 to 0 3G3FV-PDRT1-SINV1
n Inverter run commands DeviceNet Communications
n+1 Rotational speed reference Card
Note: T-branch wiring using
Input (3G3FV to PC) Thin Cables
Switch
Run Reverse
Forward Stop
Power supply
Selection of either the communications Motor
control input or local control input is
possible using Net.Ctrl./Net.Ref.
5-3
S Words Allocated to SYSDRIVE 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Inverters

A SYSDRIVE 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Inverter is allocated a total of four SYSMAC I/O words (two input
and two output) via a DeviceNet Communications Card.
I/O classification Word address Bits
15 to 8 7 to 0
Output n Not used. Inverter run commands
(SYSMAC PC to n+1 Rotational speed reference Rotational speed reference
Inverter) (leftmost bits) (rightmost bits)
Input m Not used. Inverter status
(I
(Inverter to m+1 Rotational speed monitor Rotational speed monitor
SYSMAC PC) (leftmost bits) (rightmost bits)
D Inverter Run Commands

Word n
Bit Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Signal Not used. Net Reference Net Control Not used. Not used. Fault Reset Reverse/ Forward/
name stop stop
Content --- 0: b1-01 0: b1-02 --- --- 0: --- 0: Stop 0: Stop
1: DeviceNet 1: DeviceNet 1: Fault 1: Reverse 1: Forward
(See note 1.) (See note 2.) Reset
Note 1. Net Reference is used to specify the frequency reference as follows (cannot be changed dur-
ing running):
0: The frequency reference input method specified by the frequency reference source selec-
tion (b1-01) is used.
1: Set b1-01 to “3” and operate via DeviceNet. (Operate with rotational speed reference in
word n+1.)
Note 2. Net Control is used to change the run command as follows (cannot be changed during run-
ning):
0: The run command input method specified by the run command source selection (b1-02) is
used.
1: Set b1-02 to “3” and operate via DeviceNet. (Follow run command in word n, bits 0 and 1.)
D Inverter Status
Word m
Bit Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Signal At Reference Reference Control From Inverter During During Warning Fault
name From Net Net Ready reverse run forward run (Minor
Fault)
Content 0: Accelerating 0: b1-01 0: b1-02 0: 0: Stop/ 0: Stop/ 0: Normal 0: Normal
or 1: DeviceNet 1: DeviceNet Preparing forward reverse 1: Alarm 1: Fault
Decelerating (See note 1.) (See note 2.) 1: Ready 1: During 1: During (Minor
1: At reference reverse run forward run Fault)
(See note 4.) (See note 5.)
Note 1. Reference From Net shows the input status of word n, bit 6 (Net Reference) for DeviceNet
communications.
Note 2. Control From Net shows the input status of word n, bit 5 (Net Control) for DeviceNet commu-
nications.
Note 3. Reverse Operation indicates reverse output status. This bit does not turn ON for DC braking
(DC injection).
5-4
Note 4. Forward Operation indicates either forward run status or DC braking (DC injection) status.
This bit turns ON even for DC braking (DC injection) during reverse run.
D Rotational Speed Reference Data

Word address n+1
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Signal name Rotational speed reference data
Content Communications data = Rotational speed reference x 2a
a: Speed scale value of Class 2A, Instance 01, Attribute 16 (Initial value: 0)
• The speed scale is assigned to the message function. For instructions on how to change it, refer to 5-5 Mes-
sage Communications.
• The unit for the rotational speed reference is set in o1-03 (frequency reference setting and display units)
• Setting example (providing reference of 1,800 r/min):
When the speed scale value is “0” and the number of motor poles is set in 01-03 (so unit is r/min):
1,800 r/min → 1,800 x20 → 1,800 → 0708 Hex
Note 1. Under the DeviceNet protocol, the unit for the speed reference is fixed as r/min. The number
of motor poles (2 to 39) must be set in parameter o1-03 (frequency reference setting and dis-
play units) when using DeviceNet (open network).
Note 2. If the setting in not within the proper range, the previous data will be retained and the desig-
nated rotational speed will not be entered.
D Rotational Speed Monitor Data

Word address m+1
Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Signal name Rotational speed monitor data
Content Communications data = Rotational speed monitor x 2a
a: Speed scale value of Class 2A, Instance 01, Attribute 16 (Initial value: 0)
• The speed scale is assigned to the message function. For instructions on how to change it, refer to 5-5 Mes-
sage Communications.
• The unit for the rotational speed monitor is set in o1-03 (frequency reference setting and display units)
• Data conversion example:
When the speed scale value is “0” and the number of motor poles is set in 01-03, and the read data is 03E8 Hex:
03E8 Hex → 1,000 → 1,000/20 → 1,000 r/min
Note Under the DeviceNet protocol, the unit for the speed reference is fixed as r/min. The number of
motor poles (2 to 39) must be set in parameter o1-03 (frequency reference setting and display
units) when using DeviceNet (open network).
5-1-2 Types of Remote I/O Operation

There are 4 types of DeviceNet Communications Card remote I/O operation:
• Basic remote I/O: Remote I/O operation for the standard DeviceNet configuration.
• Standard remote I/O: Remote I/O operation (DeviceNet-compatible) that is the default setting for the
DeviceNet Communications Card.
• Special remote I/O: Remote I/O operations that enable using all the functions of
3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Inverters, and accessing/setting for all parameters. (Special remote I/O op-
eration is a special function of this product; it is not compatible with DeviceNet.)
5-5
• Control remote I/O: Remote I/O operation according to the control terminal input/output signals of
3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Inverters. (Control remote I/O operation is a special function of this product; it
is not compatible with DeviceNet.)
The default setting is for standard remote I/O operation, so it will be necessary to switch to either of the
other types of remote I/O operation if desired. Switching the remote I/O operation involves the use of
message communications. Refer to 5-5 Message Communications and 5-2 Switching Remote I/O Op-
eration.
S Basic Remote I/O

Basic remote I/O is used for the standard DeviceNet configuration.
D Outputs (SYSMAC PC to Inverter) Instance ID: 20 Dec (14 Hex)

Byte number Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd n Rightmost 0 Fault Forward/
Reset stop
Leftmost 1
Wd
d n+1 Rightmost 2 Rotational speed reference (rightmost data)
Leftmost 3 Rotational speed reference (leftmost data)
D Inputs (Inverter to SYSMAC PC) Instance ID: 70 Dec (46 Hex)

Wd m Rightmost 0 During Fault
forward
run
Leftmost 1
Wd
d m+1 Rightmost 2 Rotational speed reference (rightmost data)
Note 1. A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used.

Note 2. The basic remote I/O operation is the same as those explained for standard remote I/O. (Ba-
sic remote I/O restricts the operation of standard remote I/O.)
S Standard Remote I/O

Standard remote I/O is the default setting for the DeviceNet Communications Card.

Wd n Rightmost 0 Net Net Fault Reverse/ Forward/
Reference Control Reset stop stop
Leftmost 1
Wd
d n+1 Rightmost 2 Rotational speed reference (rightmost data)

Wd m Rightmost 0 At Reference Control Inverter During During Warning Fault
Reference From Net From Net Ready reverse forward (minor
run run fault)
Leftmost 1
Wd
d m+1 Rightmost 2 Rotational speed monitor (rightmost data)
Leftmost 3 Rotational speed monitor (leftmost data)
5-6
Note A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used.
S Special Remote I/O

Special remote I/O enables using all the functions of 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Inverters, and accessing/
setting all parameters.

Wd
dn Rightmost 0 Function code (write/read code)
Leftmost 1 Register number, leftmost byte (register number assigned to various parameters, etc.)
Wd
d n+1 Rightmost 2 Register number, rightmost byte (register number assigned to various parameters, etc.)
Leftmost 3 Register data, leftmost byte (data to write to specified register)
Wd n+2 Rightmost 4 Register data, rightmost byte (data to write to specified register)
Wd
dm Rightmost 0 Function code (returns transmitted code)
Leftmost 1 Register number, leftmost byte (returns transmitted register number)
Wd
d m+1 Rightmost 2 Register number, rightmost byte (returns transmitted register number)
Leftmost 3 Register data, leftmost byte (return transfer data amount or read data)
Wd m+2 Rightmost 4 Register data, rightmost byte (return transfer data amount or read data)
Note 1. Special remote I/O outputs and inputs are paired. When using special remote I/O, be sure to
set them together.
Note 2. Special remote I/O objects do not conform to the AC/DC drive profile, but are specially set for
this product.
Note 3. The 16-bit data (register number and register data) is set using two words for each setting.
Note 4. Be careful of the order of the leftmost and rightmost bytes of the 16-bit data. The order is re-
versed from that of basic and standard remote I/O.
Note 5. For details on special remote I/O operation, refer to 5-3 Special Remote I/O.
Note 6. 3G3RV Inverters support special remote I/O from version VSF105091 (Asian models: Ver-
sion VSF105081).
S Control Remote I/O

Control remote I/O enables using the functions and arrays of the Inverter control terminal I/O signals.
The Inverter’s multi-function I/O functions can be used during communications.
• Outputs (SYSMAC PC to Inverter) Instance ID: 101 Dec (65 Hex)
Wd n Rightmost 0 Multi-func- Multi-func- Multi-func- Multi-func- Multi-func- Multi-func- Stop/re- Stop/for-
tion input 6 tion input 5 tion input 4 tion input 3 tion input 2 tion input 1 verse ward
Leftmost 1 Multi-func- Multi-func- Multi-func- Fault reset External
tion output tion output tion con- fault input
2 1 tact output
Wd
d n+1 Rightmost 2 Frequency reference, rightmost byte
Leftmost 3 Frequency reference, leftmost byte
Wd
d n+2 Rightmost 4 Torque reference/torque limit, rightmost byte
Leftmost 5 Torque reference/torque limit, leftmost byte
Wd
d n+3
3 Rightmost 6 Torque compensation bias, rightmost byte
Leftmost 7 Torque compensation bias, leftmost byte
5-7
• Inputs (Inverter to SYSMAC PC) Instance ID: 151 Dec (97 Hex)
Wd m Rightmost 0 Fault Alarm (mi- Inverter At refer- During re- During re- Zero During run
nor fault) ready ence set input verse run speed
Leftmost 1 P-lock Multi-func- Multi-func- Multi-func- Local/re- Undervol- Operation
completion tion output tion output tion con- mote tage fault
2 1 tact output
Wd
d m+1 Rightmost 2 Output frequency monitor, rightmost byte
Leftmost 3 Output frequency monitor, leftmost byte
Wd
d m+2 Rightmost 4 Torque reference monitor, rightmost byte
Leftmost 5 Torque reference monitor, leftmost byte
Wd
d m+3
3 Rightmost 6 Output current monitor, rightmost byte
Leftmost 7 Output current monitor, leftmost byte

Note 2. Control remote I/O inputs and outputs are paired. When using control remote I/O, be sure to
set them together.
Note 3. Control remote I/O objects do not conform to the AC/DC drive profile, but are specially set for
this product.
Note 4. For details of control remote I/O functions, refer to 5-4 Control Remote I/O Operation.
5-8
5-2 Switching Remote I/O Operation

To use remote I/O operations other than the standard remote I/O operation it is necessary to switch the
remote I/O operation. There are two ways to switch:
• Set the remote I/O instance IDs for parameter objects.
• Set the remote I/O instance IDs for connection objects.
When using an OMRON Master Unit, set the remote I/O instance IDs for parameter objects, using the
Master Unit’s message functions or the Configurator. When using a CS1W-DRM21 or CJ1W-DRM21
Master Unit, the connection object at communications startup can be specified using the Configurator.
Set the connection path from the Configurator.
S Switching via Parameter Objects (Using the Configurator)

To switch remote I/O operations using parameter objects, the appropriate instance IDs must be set for
the following parameter objects.
• Switching remote I/O inputs (Inverter to SYSMAC PC):
Class 101 Dec (65 Hex), Instance 01 Dec (01 Hex), Attribute 01 Dec (01 Hex)
• Switching remote I/O outputs (SYSMAC PC to Inverter)
Class 101 Dec (65 Hex), Instance 01 Dec (01 Hex), Attribute 02 Dec (02 Hex)
The instances to be set are shown in the following table.
Remote I/O type
yp Instance ID
Inputs (Inverter to PC) Outputs (PC to Inverter)
Basic remote I/O 70 Dec (46 Hex) 20 Dec (14 Hex)
Standard remote I/O 71 Dec (47 Hex) 21 Dec (15 Hex)
Special remote I/O 150 Dec (96 Hex) 100 Dec (64 Hex)
Control remote I/O 151 Dec (97 Hex) 101 Dec (65 Hex)
The procedure for switching remote I/O operations by means of parameter objects using the Configura-
tor is as follows:
1. Connect the Inverter and a Configurator to the DeviceNet communications network. At least a Devi-
ceNet Communications Card and a Configurator must be connected.
2. Set up the explicit message connection
Turn ON the power to the Configurator and all Units participating in communications and press the
Configurator’s online button. This will put the system into online status.
Click the Device List button at the upper left corner of the Configurator screen. With this, the explic-
it message connection will be set up.
3. Connect the remote I/O to be used for the parameter objects.
Select Tool (T) and then Device Parameter Setting (P) from the Configurator tool bar to display the
parameter setting tool.
Set the node address, and then set the remote I/O instance IDs for the parameter objects de-
scribed above (attributes 01 and 02 Hex of class 65 Hex, instance 01 Hex).
4. Change the Master Unit and Inverter connection to the set connection.
Reset the power to the Master Unit and Inverter. The remote I/O connection will then start up with
the specified remote I/O operation.
5-9
When creating scan lists, set the scan list to disable mode once and then create scan lists or
change the settings as follows for the Inverter I/O allocation byte number from the Configurator.
Basic/Standard remote I/O: 4 bytes (both for OUT and IN)
Special remote I/O: 4 bytes (both for OUT and IN)
Control remote I/O: 8 bytes (both for OUT and IN)
S Switching via Connection Objects

This method is defined by ODVA AC/DC drive objects. Switching via connection objects is possible only
when using a CS1W-DRM21 or CJ1W-DRM21 Master Unit. Set the remote I/O connection path used
for the scan list with the Configurator. At communications startup, Slave communications are started
from the Master Unit with the connection path set in the scan list.
Connection Objects for Switching Remote I/O Operations

To switch remote I/O operations by this method, the appropriate instance IDs must be set for the con-
nection path in the following connection objects.
• Switching remote I/O inputs (Inverter to SYSMAC PC):
Produced connection path (Class 05 Hex, Instance 02 Hex, Attribute 14 Hex)
• Switching remote I/O outputs (SYSMAC PC to Inverter)
Consumed connection path (Class 05 Hex, Instance 02 Hex, Attribute 16 Hex)
Remote I/O Instance ID

The instances to be set are shown in the following table.
Remote I/O type
yp Instance ID
Inputs (Inverter to PC) Outputs (PC to Inverter)
Basic remote I/O 70 Dec (46 Hex) 20 Dec (14 Hex)
Standard remote I/O 71 Dec (47 Hex) 21 Dec (15 Hex)
Special remote I/O 150 Dec (96 Hex) 100 Dec (64 Hex)
Control remote I/O 151 Dec (97 Hex) 101 Dec (65 Hex)
Restrictions on Switching Remote I/O

To switch remote I/O operations, maintain either of the following conditions and send an explicit mes-
sage.
• Remote I/O communications stopped after the remote I/O connection and explicit message connec-
tion have been established.
• Remote I/O connection allocated after explicit message connection has been established.
Note 1. With CS1W-DRM21 and CJ1W-DRM21 Master Units, the connection path is automatically
set at communications startup.
Note 2. This setting is not possible with CVM1-DRM21-V1 and C200HW-DRM21-V1 Master Units.
5-10
Data Setting Example
The set data must be converted to signal segments as defined by DeviceNet and then transferred. For
example, when remote I/O inputs are converted to special remote I/O inputs (instance ID: 96 Hex), the
set data is as follows:
7 0 7 0 7 0
0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 =62 39 36 Hex
“9” in ASCII code “6” in ASCII code

Instance ID set as ASCII code
Number of subsequent bytes (2 bytes)
Header showing signal segment (011)
Note For details on using message communications, refer to 5-5 Message Communications (Device-
Net Explicit Messages and the operation manual for the Master Unit being used.
5-11
5-3 Special Remote I/O Operation

There are four kinds of DeviceNet remote I/O operation: Basic remote I/O, standard remote I/O (the
default setting), special remote I/O, and control remote I/O. This section explains special remote I/O.
Special remote I/O operation enables using all the functions of 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Inverters, and
setting and reading all parameters. These operations have been developed independently, and are not
part of the DeviceNet standard.
Note 3G3RV Inverters support special remote I/O from version VSF105091 (Asian models: Version
VSF105081).
5-3-1 Overview of Special Remote I/O

Special remote I/O operations utilize DeviceNet remote I/O, and can directly write to and read from in-
ternal Inverter registers. Basically, the register numbers for the various functions shown on this and sub-
sequent pages are specified for writing or reading. Once data has been written, it is retained until it is
changed by the next write operation.
S Words Used for Special Remote I/O

Wd
dn Rightmost 0 Function code (write/read code)
Leftmost 1 Register number leftmost byte (register number allocated to each parameter, etc.)
Wd
d n+1 Rightmost 2 Register number rightmost byte (register number allocated to each parameter, etc.)
Leftmost 3 Register data leftmost byte (data to write to specified register)
Wd n+2 Rightmost 4 Register data rightmost byte (data to write to specified register)
D Outputs (Inverter to SYSMAC PC) Instance ID: 150 Dec (96 Hex)
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Wd
dm Rightmost 0 Function code (returns transmitted code)
Leftmost 1 Register number leftmost byte (returns transmitted register number)
Wd
d m+1 Rightmost 2 Register number rightmost byte (returns transmitted register number)
Leftmost 3 Register data leftmost byte (returns transmitted data amount or reads data)
Wd m+2 Rightmost 4 Register data rightmost byte (returns transmitted data amount or reads data)
Note 1. Special remote I/O outputs and inputs are paired. When using special remote I/O, be sure to
set them together.
Note 2. Special remote I/O objects do not conform to the AC/DC drive profile, but are specially set for
this product.
Note 3. The 16-bit data (register number and register data) is set in two words for each setting.
S Function Codes
The special remote I/O function codes are shown in the following table. Note that they are different from
the explicit message service codes.
Function code (hex) Content
10 Data writing
03 Data reading
00 No execution (data wrapping only; no internal
processing takes place.)
5-12
S Setting Data for Operations and Parameter

Read data and write data to be set for operations and parameters are calculated as shown below and
then transmitted in hexadecimal.
• Convert to hexadecimal values with the operation/parameter minimum setting value as 1.
• Negative numbers are expressed as two’s complements.
• If the original data is already displayed in hexadecimal, it is transmitted as is.
• Set bits that are not used to “0.”
• Do not set data for unused registers.
Example 1
In this example, the frequency reference is 60 Hz, and the minimum setting unit is 0.01 Hz.
60/0.01 = 6000 → 1770 hex
Example 2
In this example, –50% (minimum setting unit: 0.1%) is set for the frequency reference (voltage) terminal
13 input bias.
50/0.1 = 500 → 01F4 hex
Bit reversal
+1
= FE0C hex
Example 3
In this example, “1F (hex)” is set for multi-function inputs.
“1F” is transmitted.
S Enabling Parameter Setting Data by Enter Command

When setting (writing) data in parameters, be sure to send an enter command. After receiving the enter
command, the Inverter will enable the data newly set in the parameters as operation data.
When setting (writing) data in more than one parameter, send an enter command once after completing
all the settings. All the parameters newly set before the enter command is sent will be enabled.
Data type Transmission Inverter operation Remarks
Enter command written in Function code: 10 hex When receiving an enter Applicable to all the
EEPROM Register No.: FFFD hex command, a series of Inverter software.
parameter setting data
Send data: 0000 hex will be stored in
EEPROM and enabled
as operation data.
Enter command not Function code: 10 hex When receiving an enter Applicable to Inverters
written in EEPROM Register No.: FFDD hex command, a series of with software version of
parameter setting data S1042 or later.
Send data: 0000 hex will be enabled without
storing them in
EEPROM.
All the set data will be
cleared to the initial data
when the power is turned
OFF.
5-13
Note 1. Unless an enter command is transmitted, data will not be enabled and the Inverter may not
start.
Note 2. The enter command requires a parameter (Register No. 0100 or higher). Since the run com-
mand or frequency reference (Register No. 0000 to 000F) is stored only in the RAM area, set
data will be enabled without an enter command.
S Special Remote I/O Responses

When data is written and read using special remote I/O, the responses shown in the following table are
returned. Check that the input data and output data match when handling communications.
Error code Content
--- Normal completion response
The function code and register number at the time of transmission are placed at
the beginning, and returned with the data amount (when data is written) or the
read data (when data is read) attached.
01 Function code error
An unsupported function code was received.
02 Register number error
An unregistered register number was received.
21 Data setting error
An upper or lower limit was exceeded, or a constant restriction was violated. (See
note 2.)
22 Writing mode error
Either writing was executed during operation or during a CPU error, during UV, or
writing was attempted to a read-only register.
24 Busy
Writing was attempted during constant processing.
Note 1. When a communications error occurs, the function code MSB will be returned as “1.”
Note 2. A “constant restriction” is a restriction on OPE error detection.
5-3-2 Special Remote I/O Communications Timing

With special remote I/O communications, it is possible to use all of the SYSDRIVE
3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV functions, such as frequency setting, control input setting, error monitoring,
output frequency monitoring, and so on. These functions are utilized by setting the register numbers
and connecting to the various 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV functions. To use these functions properly, be
sure to use the following method to handle the data and provide a program for switching the commu-
nications processing.
S Matching Function Codes and Register Numbers

• In the remote I/O outputs (SYSMAC PC to Inverter), set the function code, register number, and set
data for the function to be executed.
• Compare (CMP) the function codes and register numbers of the set remote I/O outputs and the remote
I/O inputs (Inverter to SYSMAC PC). If they agree, proceed to the next process.
Note If data is repeatedly written to the same register number, it cannot be handled. Be sure to keep
performing processes with different function codes or register numbers. If it is necessary to write
repeatedly to the same register number, then alternately write to and read from that register.
(Handling data is made possible by changing function codes.)
5-14
S Handling Illustration (for 3G3RV)
Function code 10 hex 10 hex 03 hex 03 hex

register number 0002 hex 0001 hex 0024 hex 002C hex
Processing Frequency reference writing Inverter run command writing Output frequency monitoring Inverter status reading
contents
Transmission
completed signal
Function code-response number comparison (CMP)
5-3-3 Parameter Register Numbers for Each Function

Refer to 5-6 3G3RV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes, 5-7 3G3PV Register Num-
bers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes, and 5-8 3G3FV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and
Attributes.
5-15
5-4 Control Remote I/O Operation

There are four kinds of DeviceNet remote I/O operation: Basic remote I/O, standard remote I/O (the
default setting), special remote I/O, and control remote I/O. This section explains control remote I/O.
Control remote I/O enables using the functions and arrays of the Inverter control terminal I/O signals.
The Inverter’s multi-function I/O functions can be used during communications. These operations have
been developed independently, and are not part of the DeviceNet standard.
S Words Used for Control Remote I/O

• Outputs (SYSMAC PC to Inverter) Instance ID: 101 Dec (65 Hex)
Wd n Rightmost 0 Multi-func- Multi-func- Multi-func- Multi-func- Multi-func- Multi-func- Stop/re- Stop/for-
tion input 6 tion input 5 tion input 4 tion input 3 tion input 2 tion input 1 verse ward
Leftmost 1 Multi-func- Multi-func- Multi-func- Fault reset External
tion output tion output tion con- fault input
2 1 tact output
Wd
d n+1 Rightmost 2 Frequency reference, rightmost byte
Leftmost 3 Frequency reference, leftmost byte
Wd
d n+2 Rightmost 4 Torque reference/torque limit, rightmost byte
Leftmost 5 Torque reference/torque limit, leftmost byte
Wd
d n+3
3 Rightmost 6 Torque compensation bias, rightmost byte
Leftmost 7 Torque compensation bias, leftmost byte
• Inputs (Inverter to SYSMAC PC) Instance ID: 151 Dec (97 Hex)
Wd m Rightmost 0 Fault Alarm (mi- Inverter At refer- During re- During re- Zero During run
nor fault) ready ence set input verse run speed
Leftmost 1 P lock/ Multi-func- Multi-func- Multi-func- Local/re- Undervol- Operation
completion tion output tion output tion con- mote tage fault
2 1 tact output
Wd
d m+1 Rightmost 2 Output frequency monitor, rightmost byte
Leftmost 3 Output frequency monitor, leftmost byte
Wd
d m+2 Rightmost 4 Torque reference monitor, rightmost byte
Leftmost 5 Torque reference monitor, leftmost byte
Wd
d m+3
3 Rightmost 6 Output current monitor, rightmost byte
Leftmost 7 Output current monitor, leftmost byte

Note 2. Control remote I/O inputs and outputs are paired. When using control remote I/O, be sure to
set them together.
Note 3. Control remote I/O objects do not conform to the AC/DC drive profile, but are specially set for
this product.
5-16
D Word n (Inverter Operation Commands)
Word Bit Signal name Contents
n 0 Stop/forward 0: Stop
1: Forward
1 Stop/reverse 0: Stop
1: Reverse
2 Multi-function input 1 (See note 1.) 0: ---
1: Function set for multi-function input 1
7 Multi-function input 6 (See notes 1 and 2.) 0: ---
8 External fault input 0: ---
1: External fault (EFO)
9 Fault reset 0: ---
1: Reset
10 Not used. ---
11 Not used. ---
12 Not used. ---
13 Multi-function contact output (See note 3.) 0: OFF (open)
1: ON (closed)
14 Multi-function output 1 (See note 3.) 0: OFF (open)
1: ON (closed)
15 Multi-function output 2 (See note 3.) 0: OFF (open)
1: ON (closed)
Note 1. The functions set with parameters H1-01 to H1-05 (multi-function inputs 1 to 5) for
3G3RV/3G3PV Inverters and H1-01 to H1-06 (multi-function inputs 1 to 6) for 3G3FV Invert-
ers can be controlled with these bits.
Note 2. This bit is not used with 3G3RV/3G3PV Inverters. (These Inverters have only 5 multi-function
inputs.)
Note 3. The settings of these bits are enabled when parameters H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function con-
tact output and multi-function outputs 1 and 2) are set to F. (Same for 3G3RV, 3G3PV, and
3G3FV Inverters.) Output from the control terminal block of the Inverter can be controlled via
communications.
5-17
D Word m (Inverter Status)
Word Bit Signal name Contents
m 0 During run 0: ---
1: During run
1 Zero speed 0: ---
1: Zero speed
2 During reverse run 0: ---
1: During reverse run
3 During reset input 0: ---
1: During reset input
4 At reference 0: ---
1: At reference
5 Inverter ready 0: ---
1: Inverter ready
6 Alarm (minor fault) 0: ---
1: Alarm
7 Fault 0: ---
1: Fault
8 Operation error 0: ---
1: Operation error
9 Undervoltage 0: ---
1: Undervoltage
10 Run command selection status 0: ---
1: Communications
11 Multi-function contact output (See note 1.) 0: ---
1: Function set in H2-01
12 Multi-function output 1 (See note 1.) 0: ---
13 Multi-function output 2 (See note 1 and 2.) 0: ---
14 Not used. ---
15 P lock/completion (See note 3.) 0: ---
1: During P lock
Note 1. The functions set with parameters H2-01 to H2-03 (multi-function contact output and multi-
function contact outputs 1 and 2) for 3G3RV/3G3FV Inverters, and with parameters H2-01
and H2-02 (multi-function contact output and multi-function output 1) for 3G3PV, are enabled
with these bits.
Note 2. This bit is not used with 3G3PV Inverters. (These Inverters have only 2 multi-function out-
puts.)
Note 3. The P lock function is only available with 3G3FV Inverters used in flux vector control mode. It
cannot be used with any other Inverter series or control mode.
5-18
D Reference Data
Word Signal name Content
n+1 Frequency reference Specifies the Inverter output frequency from communications.
• Setting unit: 0.01 Hz (See note 1.)
• Setting range: 0 to maximum frequency in Hz (See note 2.)
Example: To set the frequency reference to 60.00 Hz:
60.00 Hz/(0.01 Hz) = 6000 Dec = 1770 Hex ⇒ Set as 1770 Hex.
n+2 Torque Specifies the torque reference or torque limit for the Inverter output. (See notes 3 and 4.)
reference/torque limit The torque limit/torque reference is only enabled when flux vector control is set.
• Whether torque reference or torque limit is specified depends on the Inverter’s control mode.
Speed control: torque limit Torque control: torque reference
• Setting unit: 0.1% (100% = motor rated torque)
• Setting range: –300.0% to 300.0% (See note 5.)
Example: To set the torque reference to 10%:
10%/(0.1%) = 100 Dec = 64 Hex ⇒ Set as 64 Hex.
n+3 Torque compensation Specifies the torque compensation bias when using torque control. (See note 3.)
bias Torque compensation bias is only available when performing torque control in flux vector control
mode. It is used separately from torque control to compensate for mechanical torque loss.
• Setting unit: 0.1% (100% = motor rated torque)
• Setting range: –300.0% to 300.0% (See note 5.)
Example: To set the torque compensation bias to 100%:
100.0%/(0.1%) = 1000 Dec = 3E8 Hex ⇒ Set as 3E8 Hex.
Note 1. The data setting unit can be changed with o1-03 (frequency reference setting/display unit).
Note 2. Data that exceeds the upper or lower setting range limits will be considered faulty and ignored
by the Inverter, and the previous data will be maintained.
Note 3. This function is only available with 3G3FV Inverters, which are equipped with flux vector con-
trol mode. Do not use with 3G3RV/3G3PV Inverters.
Note 4. When not using either the torque limit of the torque reference, set F9-05 (torque reference/
torque limit selection from communications) to 0 (disabled). If this setting is not disabled and
“0” is sent as data, the torque limit/torque reference will be set to 0, and there will be no torque
output (i.e., the motor will not operate).
Note 5. Although the setting range for torque reference/torque limit is –300.0% to 300.0%, the torque
actually output depends on the motor characteristics. For a general-purpose motor, take the
range to be –200.0% to 200.0%.
5-19
D Monitor Data
Word Signal name Content
m+1 Output frequency Gives the frequency being output by the Inverter.
monitor
• Monitor unit: 0.01 Hz (See note 1.)
Example: Output frequency when the monitor value is 1388 Hex:
1388 Hex = 5000 Dec × (0.01 Hz) = 50.00 Hz
m+2 Torque reference Gives the torque reference value inside the Inverter (See note 2.)
monitor
• Monitor unit: 0.1% (100% is motor rated torque)
Example: Torque reference for monitor value of 1F4 Hex:
1F4 Hex = 500 Dec × (0.1%) = 50% (relative to motor rated torque)
m+3 Output current Gives the value of the current being output by the Inverter (See note 3.)
monitor
• Monitor unit:
0.01 A (for Inverters with maximum motor capacity of 7.5 kW)
0.1 A (for Inverters with maximum motor capacity of 11 kW)
Example: Output current for 0.4-kW 3G3RV Inverter with monitor value of C8 Hex:
C8 Hex = 200 Dec × (0.01 A) = 2.00 A
Note 1. The data setting unit can be changed with o1-03 (frequency reference setting/display unit).
(Same for 3G3RV, 3G3PV, and 3G3FV Inverters.)
Note 2. The torque reference monitor is valid only if open-loop vector control (sensorless vector con-
trol) or flux vector control is set.
Note 3. With 3G3RV/3G3PV Inverters, do not set F6-05 (current monitor display unit selection) to 1
(% units).
5-20
5-5 Message Communications (DeviceNet Explicit Messages)

There are two types of DeviceNet communications: Remote I/O and message communications. This
sections explains DeviceNet Communications Card message communications. With message com-
munications, specific instructions (SEND, RECV, CMND, and IOWR) are used for reading and writing
data between Master and Slave Units.
5-5-1 Overview of Message Communications (Explicit Message

Operations)
S Message Communications Operations
Message communications enable data to be exchanged as required between nodes (i.e., between
Masters or between Masters and Slaves) on a DeviceNet Network. For example, the accumulated data
from a given PC can be read from another PC, and constants from various Slaves can be changed from
a PC. To use message communications, however, both nodes involved in the data exchange must sup-
port message communications.
Message communications function

C200HW-DRM21-V1 or
CVM1-DRM21-V1 (Master Unit)
CMND (490) Reading Inverter
output current
3G3FV Inverter
3G3FV-PDRT1-SINV1 DeviceNet
Communications Card
Note: T-branch wiring using Thin Cables
S Types of Message Communications

DeviceNet message communications are broadly divided into the two categories described below. Of
these two categories, the Inverter’s DeviceNet Communications Card supports explicit messages.
• Explicit Messages
Explicit messages are defined by DeviceNet. The class, instance, and attribute are specified for
executing message communications. The messages are the same for all Inverter products, so mes-
sages can be exchanged in the same way with masters made by other manufacturers.
• FINS Messages
Messages can be exchanged using FINS commands between DeviceNet nodes (Masters and
Slaves) that support FINS messages. (FINS commands are actually sent and received using Device-
Net explicit messages.)
5-21
Note Message communications are supported by CS/CJ-series, CV-series and C200HX/HG/HE PCs,
but not by C200HS PCs.
S Overview of Explicit Messages

Explicit messages are sent and received as described below. Basically explicit message communica-
tions are executed in 1-byte (8-bit) units.
Header Node address Service code Class Instance Attribute Data Footer
Item Content
Header The header indicates the beginning of an explicit message and that the frame is an
explicit message request/response. It is set automatically for DeviceNet, so there is
no particular need to be concerned with it.
Node address Request: Set the node address of the Slave/Master to be requested.
Response: The node address of the responding Slave/Master is set.
Service code Request: Set the code of the requested service (read/write, etc.).
Response: The MSB (most significant bit) of the requested service code is
changed to “1” and returned.
Class Function classification (major Indicates the classification of a function
classification) defined by DeviceNet. To sspecify
ecify a function,
Instance Instance classification (minor specify these three codes.
classification)
Attribute Attribute (Set values are assigned
for each function.)
Data Request: Set the data to be written.
Response: Read-requested data or fault message are attached.
Footer This is the part that indicates the end of the explicit message and executes the
CRC check. It is set automatically for DeviceNet, so there is no particular need to
be concerned with it.
5-5-2 Sending and Receiving Messages with a CS1W-DRM21

or CJ1W-DRM21 DeviceNet Unit
S Using CMND(194)
With a CS1W-DRM21 or CJ1W-DRM21 DeviceNet Unit, CMND(490) is used to send explicit mes-
sages. To send an explicit message, it is necessary to place FINS command “2801” in front and to send
the command to the Master Unit. The Master Unit that receives the command converts the command
data to an explicit message and transfers it to the destination node. When sending an explicit message,
it is not possible to directly specify the destination node with CMND(490).
(↑)CMND(490)
5-22
D S: Beginning Command Storage Word
Specify the beginning word address for the command data transferred to the DeviceNet Master Unit.
Preset the data to be transferred in consecutive words as shown in the following table.
Word address Bits
15 to 8 7 to 0
S Command data (Set explicit message FINS command “2801.”)
S+1 Node of Slave or Master for transmission Explicit message service code
Address: 0 to 3F Hex (0 to 63) Write: 10 Read: 0E
S+2 Class ID code (Set DeviceNet class code for relevant function.)
Set within 0001 to 002A, or 0064 (Hex) with Inverter’s DeviceNet Communications
Card.
S+3 Instance ID code (Set DeviceNet instance code for relevant function.)
S+4 Attribute ID code Attached data (for writing)
(Set DeviceNet attribute code for relevant
function.)
--- Attached data (for writing)
D D: Beginning Response Storage Word

Specify the beginning word address of the area for storing responses to messages.
D C: Beginning Control Code Word

Specify the beginning word address of the area for storing the required control codes for message com-
munications. The control codes shown in the following table are required by DeviceNet Master Units.
Preset the data in consecutive words.
Word address Bits
15 14 to 8 7 to 0
C Number of command data bytes: 0000 to 00A0 Hex (0 to 160 bytes)
Set the amount of data from the beginning S word.
C+1 Number of response data bytes: 0000 to 00A0 Hex (0 to 160 bytes)
Set the size of the data storage area from the beginning D word.
C+2 Network address: 0001 to 007F Hex (1 to 127)
When using CMND(490) with the CS/CJ Series, a network address must be set for each
DeviceNet Master Unit. The network address is edited using the routing table edit function
of a Peripheral Device (except for the Programming Console).
C+3 Command destination node address: 00 to Command destination Unit address
3F Hex (0 to 63) Set Master Unit (FE) or Master Unit’s unit
Node address of the Master Unit number, 10 to 1F Hex (0 to 15).
C+4 Response Communications port number: 0 Number of retries: 00 to 0F Hex (0 to 15)
to 7 Set the number of times to resend for error
Set the communications port response.
used for DeviceNet.
C+5 Response monitor time:
0000 Hex → 2 s
0001 to FFFF Hex → 0.1 to 6553.5 s (unit: 0.1 s)
Set at least 2 seconds for explicit messages.
Note Set “0” in word C+4 bit 15 to require a response or “1” to not require a response. Responses are
required for explicit messages, so set “0.”
5-23
S Message Timing
When executing CMND(490), an AND condition must be set that requires both the PC’s Network Com-
munications Enabled Flag and the Master Unit’s Message Communications Enabled Flag to be ON.
Network Communications
Enabled Flag
(↑)CMND(490)
Execution Online status S

condition (or Message
Communications D
Enabled Flag)
C
S Message Response Read Timing

Have messages read with the rising edge of the Network Communications Enabled Flag for each com-
munications port.
Enabled Flag
Read response
processing
S Communications Flags
Type
yp Name Address Content
Word Bit
SYSMAC Network Communications A202 7: Port 7 0: Execution disabled (executing)
PC flags Enabled Flag 6: Port 6 1: Execution enabled (not executing)
5: Port 5
4: Port 4
3: Port 3
2: Port 2
1: Port 1
0: Port 0
Network Communications A219 15: Port 7 0: Normal end
Error Flag 14: Port 6 1: Abnormal end
13: Port 5
12: Port 4
11: Port 3
10: Port 2
9: Port 1
8: Port 0
Master Unit Online Flag 25 x Unit 00 0: Offline
status flags number + 1: Online
1511
Message Communications 25 x Unit 12 Indicates the same status as the
Enabled Flag number + Online Flag.
1524 0: Offline
1: Online
This function is compatible with
C200HW-DRM21-V1.
5-24
5-5-3 Sending and Receiving Messages with

C200HW-DRM21-V1 DeviceNet Master Unit
S IOWR for CS1 Series

With a C200HW-DRM21-V1 DeviceNet Master Unit, explicit messages are sent using IOWR. To send
an explicit message, it is necessary to place FINS command “2801” in front and to send the command to
the Master Unit. The Master Unit that receives the command converts the command data to an explicit
message and transfers it to the destination node. (When sending an explicit message, it is not possible
to directly specify the destination node with IOWR.)
(@)IOWR
D C: Control Code
The control code is set as shown below for DeviceNet Master Units.
C:
Destination unit address: FE (Master Unit)
Master Unit must be set for explicit messages.
Destination node address: 0 to 3F Hex (0 to 63)
The Master Unit node address must be set for explicit messages.
Response setting:
ON: No response.
OFF: Response required.
Must be OFF (response required) for explicit messages.
5-25
D S: Beginning Source Word
Word ad- Bits
d
dress 15 to 8 7 to 0
S Beginning response storage word
Set with the PC’s variable area designation
g method.
S+1 Example: DM 1000
82 (DM area) 03E8 (1000 in hexadecimal) 00 (fixed at 00 for DM area)
S+2 Response monitor time:
0000 Hex → 2 s
0001 to 028F Hex → 0.1 to 65.5 s (unit: 0.1 s)
S+3 Number of command data bytes (Set in hexadecimal.)
Note: Command data is the data set in words S+4 onwards.
S+4 Command data (Set explicit message FINS command “2801.”)
Address: 0 to 3F Hex (0 to 63) Write: 10 Read: 0E
Set within 0001 to 002A, 0064 (Hex) with Inverter’s DeviceNet Communications Card.
function.)
D W: Number of Words to Transfer/Destination Unit Number

W+1 W
W:
Destination unit number (00000 to 000F Hex, 0 to 15)

Set the unit number of the Master Unit.
Number of words to transfer (0001 to 0080 Hex, 1 to 128)
Set the total number of words to be transferred, including
leading word S.
Example: 000A0001 (sends 10 words to Master Unit with
unit number 1)
S IOWR for C200HX/HG/HE

With C200HW-DRM21-V1 DeviceNet Master Unit C200HX/HG/HE PCs, explicit messages are sent
using IOWR. To send an explicit message, it is necessary to place FINS command “2801” in front and to
send the command to the Master Unit. The Master Unit that receives the command converts the com-
5-26
mand data to an explicit message and transfers it to the destination node. (When sending an explicit
message, it is not possible to directly specify the destination node with IOWR.)
(@)IOWR
D C: Control Code
The control code is set as shown below for DeviceNet Master Units.
C:
Destination unit address: FE (Master Unit)
Master Unit must be set for explicit messages.
Destination node address: 0 to 3F hex (0 to 63)
The Master Unit node address must be set for explicit messages.
Response setting:
ON: No response.
OFF: Response required.
Must be OFF (response required) for explicit messages.
D S: Beginning Source Word

Word address Bits
15 to 8 7 to 0
S Beginning response storage word
g
Set with the PC’s variable area designation method.
S+1 Example: DM 1000
82 (DM area) 03E8 (1000 in hexadecimal) 00 (fixed at 00 for DM area)
S+2 Response monitor time:
0000 hex → 2 s
0001 to 028F hex → 0.1 to 65.5 s (unit: 0.1 s)
S+3 Number of command data bytes (Set in hexadecimal.)
Note: Command data is the data set in words S+4 onwards.
S+4 Command data (Set explicit message FINS command “2801.”)
Address: 0 to 3F hex (0 to 63) Write: 10 Read: 0E
Set within 0001 to 002A or 0064 (hex) with Inverter’s DeviceNet Communications
Card.
function.)
5-27
D D: Destination Information
D:
Digits 2 to 4: Number of words to transfer (001 to 128 BCD)

Set total number of words to transfer, including leading word S.
Digit 1: Destination unit number of the Special Unit (0 to F hex, 0 to 15)
Set the unit number of the Master Unit.
S Message Timing
The Message Communications Enabled Flag must be used as an execution condition for the Master
when IOWR is used. Be sure this flag is ON before executing IOWR. If IOWR is executed when this flag
is OFF, a Special I/O Unit error may be generated for the Master.
Message
Execution Communications
condition Enabled Flag A
(@) IOWR
C
S
B
D
25506
Equals Flag
A
1. IOWR is executed when the execution condition is met and the Message Communications Enabled
Flag is ON.
2. When IOWR is executed, it is self-held by bit B.
3. When IOWR is completed, the Equals Flag turns ON and the self-holding bit is cleared.
Note 1. If IOWR ends in an error, the Equals Flag will not turn ON, so the self-holding bit will remain
ON.
Note 2. The Equals Flag is also affected by the execution of other instructions, so be careful not to use
any other such instructions between IOWR and the Equals Flag.
5-28
S Timing of Message Response Reading

Responses are read when the Message Communications Enabled Flag turns ON in the next cycle. The
Message Communications Enabled Flag will turn OFF when a Master Unit is executing message com-
munications. If the message response is faster than the PC ladder program cycle time, the Message
Communications Enabled Flag will remain ON and response processing will not be possible. Execute
the read response processing before IOWR, as shown in the following diagram, and produce a Mes-
sage Communications Status Flag (d) using bit A.
A
DIFU C
C
SET D
D
Read response
Message processing
Communications
Enabled Flag
RSET D
Execution Message
condition Communications
Enabled Flag A
(@) IOWR
B C
S
25506
A
Equals Flag
Note If the read response processing is executed after IOWR, there can be no Message Communica-
tions Enabled Flag response by means of IOWR, so an attempt could be made to read the re-
sponse even though the message communications have not been completed.
S Communications Flags For CS1 Series

Flag Functions
Equals Flag The Equals Flag turns OFF when an error occurs in writing a command
from the CPU Unit to the Master Unit.
This Flag turns ON after a command has been written normally from the
CPU Unit to the Master Unit.
Error Flag The Error Flag is OFF when all operands and the control code are legal.
This Flag turns ON when an illegal operand or control code is set or
when there is an error in instruction execution.
Message Communications The Communications Enabled Flag turns OFF during messages
Enabled Flag in the Master Unit communications or when message communications are not possible.
status area (bit 12 in CIO 2001 + This Flag is ON when message communications are possible.
10 x unit number)
5-29
Flag Functions
Equals Flag (SR 25506) The Equals Flag turns OFF when an error occurs in writing a command
from the CPU Unit to the Master Unit.
This Flag turns ON after a command has been written normally from the
CPU Unit to the Master Unit.
Error Flag (SR25503) The Error Flag is OFF when all operands and the control code are legal.
This Flag turns ON when an illegal operand or control code is set or
when there is an error in instruction execution.
Message Communications The Communications Enabled Flag turns OFF during messages
Enabled Flag in the Master Unit communications or when message communications are not possible.
status area (bit 12 in IR 101 + This Flag is ON when message communications are possible.
10 x unit No.)
5-5-4 CVM1-DRM21-V1 DeviceNet Master Unit Message

Transmission
S Using CMND(194)
With CVM1-DRM21-V1 DeviceNet Master Unit, CMND(194) is used to send explicit messages. To
send an explicit message, it is necessary to place FINS command “2801” in front and to send the com-
mand to the Master Unit. The Master Unit that receives the command converts the command data to an
explicit message and transfers it to the destination node. When sending an explicit message, it is not
possible to directly specify the destination node with CMND(194).
(194)
CMND S D C
D S: Beginning Command Storage Word

Word address Bits
15 to 8 7 to 0
S Command data (Set explicit message FINS command “2801.”)
Address: 0 to 3F hex (0 to 63) Write: 10 Read: 0E
Set within 0001 to 002A, 0064 (hex) with Inverter’s DeviceNet Communications Card.
function.)
D D: Beginning Response Storage Word

Specify the beginning word address of the area for storing responses to messages.
5-30
D C: Beginning Control Code Word
Specify the beginning word address of the area for storing the required control codes for message com-
munications. The control codes shown in the following table are required by DeviceNet Master Units.
Preset the data in consecutive words.
Word address Bits
15 14 to 8 7 to 0
C Number of command data bytes: 0000 to 00A0 hex (0 to 160 bytes)
Set the amount of data from the beginning S word.
C+1 Number of response data bytes: 0001 to 00A0 hex (0 to 160 bytes)
Set the size of the data storage area from the beginning D word.
C+2 Network address: 0001 to 007F hex (1 to 127)
When using CMND(194) with the CV Series, a network address must be set for each
DeviceNet Master Unit. The network address is edited using the routing table edit function
of a Peripheral Device (except for the Programming Console).
C+3 Command destination node address: 00 to Command destination Unit address
3F hex (0 to 63) Set Master Unit (FE) or Master Unit’s unit
Node address of the Master Unit number, 10 to 1F hex (0 to 15).
C+4 Response Communications port no.: 0 to 7 Number of retries: 00 to 0F hex (0 to 15)
Set the number of times to resend for error
response.
C+5 Response monitor time:
0000 hex → 2 s
0001 to 028F hex → 0.1 to 65.5 s (unit: 0.1 s)
Set at least 2 seconds for explicit messages.
Note Set “0” in word C+4 bit 15 to require a response or “1” to not require a response. Responses are
required for explicit messages, so set “0.”
S Message Timing
When executing CMND(194), an AND condition must be set that requires both the PC’s Network Com-
munications Enabled Flag and the Master Unit’s Message Communications Enabled Flag to be ON.
Enabled Flag (194)
CMND S D C
Execution condition Message Communications

Enabled Flag
S Message Response Read Timing

Have messages read with the rising edge of the Network Communications Enabled Flag for each com-
munications port.
Enabled Flag
Response read
processing
5-31
Type
yp Name Address Content
Word Bit
SYSMAC Network Communications A502 7: Port 7 0: Execution disabled (executing)
PC flags Enabled Flag 6: Port 6 1: Execution enabled (not executing)
5: Port 5
4: Port 4
3: Port 3
2: Port 2
1: Port 1
0: Port 0
Network Communications A502 15: Port 7 0: Normal end
Error Flag 14: Port 6 1: Abnormal end
13: Port 5
12: Port 4
11: Port 3
10: Port 2
9: Port 1
8: Port 0
Master Unit Message Communications 25 x Unit 12 0: Communications error detected;
status flag Enabled Flag number + Master Unit message communica-
1501 tions not possible.
1: Master Unit communications pos-
sible.
5-5-5 Overview of Messages and Responses

When message communications are used, the Inverter’s DeviceNet Communications Card returns re-
sponses as explained below.
Basically, DeviceNet communications are executed in 1-byte (8-bit) units. In the case of single-word
data (16 bits), the rightmost bits (least significant) and the leftmost bits (most significant) are reversed in
order due to the following reasons:
• Data on communications line is transmitted in the order of rightmost bits and leftmost bits.
• Data that is internally processed by PC for issuing commands is transmitted in the order of leftmost bits
and rightmost bits.
Therefore, reverse the order for attributes where “Word” is written in the “Size” column in the tables on
subsequent pages and create attached data or read response data.
Note There is no need to take this into consideration for remote I/O because the rightmost bits and
leftmost bits are automatically reversed.
S Command Format
28 01 32 bytes max.
Command code Destination Service Class ID Instance ID Service data (attribute No. or at-
(FINS command for PC) node address code tribute No. and write data)
5-32
S Response Format
D Normal Response
28 01 00 00 32 bytes max.
Command code Completion code Number of bytes Destination Service Service data (read data)
(FINS command for PC) transmitted node address code
D Error Response
28 01 00 00 94 2 bytes
Command code Completion code Number of bytes Destination Service Error code
(FINS command for PC) transmitted node address code
D Failure or Timeout During Transmission

28 01
Command code Completion code

(FINS command for PC) (FINS error code)
5-5-6 Motor Data Objects: Class 28 Hex

This and subsequent sections provide details on objects. There are eight types of :
• Identify objects (identification information): Class 01 hex
• Message router objects: Class 02 hex
• DeviceNet objects: Class 03 hex
• Assembly objects: Class 04 hex
• DeviceNet connection objects: Class 05 hex
• Motor data objects: Class 28
• Control supervisor objects: Class 29 hex
• AC/DC drive objects: Class 2A hex
The three types of objects related to Inverters are the motor data, control supervisor, and AC/DC drive
objects. These are explained below and in subsequent sections. The other types of objects are used
less frequently, and covered in 8-2 Objects.
Motor data objects are data and functions related to motors connected to Inverters. The motors that can
be connected to Inverters are squirrel-cage inductive motors, so the “Motor Type” is always “7.” The
motor’s rated current and rated voltage can be set and read.
S Support Service Code

Service Code No. (Hex) Service
0E Get attribute single
10 Set attribute single
5-33
S Object Details
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size
00 01 Object Software Indicates class 28 software --- 0001 Yes No Word
Revision revisions. The revision value is
advanced whenever there is a
change.
01 03 Motor Type Indicates the type of motor to be --- 07 Yes No Byte
used. The setting for a
squirrel-cage inductive motor is 7.
06 Motor Rated The motor’s rated current can be Inverter rated See Yes Yes Word
Current set and read. The setting unit is output current note 1.
0.1 A. (The setting unit can be 10% to 120%
changed using the current scale
in Class 2A, Instance 1, Attribute
17.)
07 Motor Rated The motor’s rated voltage can be 0 to 255 V 00C8 Yes Yes Word
Voltage set and read. The setting unit is 1 (0 to 510 V) (0190)
V. (The setting unit can be
See note 2. See
changed using the voltage scale
note 2.
in Class 2A, Instance 1, Attribute
1B.)
Note 1. The default setting for the motor’s rated current depends on the Inverter model.
Example: 1.90A (0013 hex) for 200-V class, 0.4 kW
Note 2. The figures enclosed in parentheses in the “Setting range” and “Default” columns are the val-
ues for 400-V class Inverters.
5-5-7 Control Supervisor Objects: Class 29 Hex

Control supervisor objects are objects that have Inverter control I/O-related functions. They are as-
signed according to their particular control I/O functions, such as forward operation, reverse operation,
error detection, and so on. Be careful when setting up a remote I/O communications connection. These
functions are shared with similar functions used for remote I/O, so even if they have been set for mes-
sage operations they may get rewritten for remote I/O.
S Support Service Codes

05 Reset attribute
Turns OFF the Forward Operation and Reverse Operation inputs and turns
ON the Fault Reset. Then turns OFF the Fault Reset when Inverter Ready
is output.
5-34
S Object Details
Instance Attribute Name Content Setting Default Read Write Size
range
Revision revisions. The revision value is
advanced whenever there is a
change.
01 03 Forward/Stop 00: Stop 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
01: Forward operation
04 Reverse/Stop 00: Stop 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
01: Reverse operation
05 Net Control 00: Operate by b1-02 setting. 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
Local/remote switch 01: Operate by DeviceNet with
b1-02 set to “3.”
Set note 1.
06 State 03 hex: Inverter ready --- 03 Yes No Byte
Inverter status
07 During forward run 00: No Inverter output or operating --- 00 Yes No Byte
in reverse.
01: Forward operation or DC
braking
Turns ON even for DC braking
during reverse operation.
08 During reverse run 00: No Inverter output or operating --- 00 Yes No Byte
in forward.
01: Operating in reverse (reverse
operation output status)
Becomes “00” with DC braking.
09 Inverter Ready 00: Preparing --- 00 Yes No Byte
Initial processing/ not drive mode/
fault
01: Inverter ready
Inverter can receive run
command.
0A Fault 00: Normal --- 00 Yes No Byte
01: Fault
0B Warning (minor fault) 00: Normal --- 00 Yes No Byte
01: Warning (minor fault)
0C Fault Reset 00: Normal status 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
01: Fault reset
0D Fault code Indicates the contents of fault that --- 0000 Yes No Word
occur. (See the fault code list on
the following page.)
0F Control From Net 00: Operating by b1-02 setting. --- 00 Yes No Byte
Run signal input 01: Operating by DeviceNet.
status
See note 1.
10 DeviceNet Fault 02: Maker’s specifications --- 02 Yes No Byte
mode
See note 2.
11 Force Fault/Trip 00: Normal operation 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
01: Communications external fault
Communications
input (according to parameter F9 )
external fault input
12 Force Status 00: Normal status --- 00 Yes No Byte
01: Communications external fault
Communications
detected. (Inverter stopped with
fault detection.)
status
Note 1. The Net Control and Control From Net functions cannot be changed during running.
Note 2. A DeviceNet Fault mode cannot be set from communications. Use the Inverter’s parameters.
5-35
D Fault Codes
DeviceNet error code Operator display Meaning
0000 --- Inverter normal
2120 GF Ground fault
2130 SC Short circuit
2200 OL2 Inverter overload
2220 OL1 Motor overload
2221 OL3 Overtorque detection 1
2300 OC Overcurrent
3130 PF Input phase loss
LF Output phase loss
3210 OV Main circuit overvoltage
3220 UV1 Undervoltage (main)
3222 UV3 Undervoltage (MC)
4200 OH Overheat
4210 OH1 Overheat
5110 UV2 Control power supply fault
5120 PUF Fuse open
5300 OPR Operator disconnection
6320 ERR EEPROM write failure
7110 RR Braking transistor failure
7112 RH Braking resistor overheating
7301 PGO PG is disconnected
7310 OS Overspeed
DEV Speed deviation
7500 BUS Communications error
9000 EF3 External fault (Terminal 3)
EF4 External fault (Terminal 4)
FF0 Communications external fault
5-36
5-5-8 AC/DC Drive Objects: Class 2A Hex

AC/DC drive objects are assigned to command-related functions for drive devices such as Inverters
and Servomotors. Command-related data reading and writing, monitor data reading, set data scale
changes, and so on, are all enabled. These functions are shared with similar functions used for remote
I/O, so even if they have been set for message operations they may get rewritten for remote I/O.

S Object Details
range
00 01 Object Software Indicates class 2A software revisions. The --- 0001 Yes No Word
Revision revision value is advanced whenever there
is a change.
01 03 At Reference 00: Stopped, accelerating or decelerating --- 00 Yes No Byte
01: At reference 1
04 Net Reference 00: Operate at B1-01 setting. 00, 01 00 Yes Yes Byte
01: Set B1-01 to “3” and operate with
(See note 1.)
DeviceNet.
06 Drive Mode 00: Open loop vector (A1-02 = 2) 00 to 03 00 Yes Yes Byte
01: V/f control (A1-02 = 0)
02: V/f control with PG (A1-02 = 1)
03: Flux vector (A1-02 = 3)
07 Speed Actual Can be referenced in hexadecimal with the --- 0000 Yes No Word
output frequency monitor (U1-02) minimum
Rotational Speed
unit as 1.
Monitor
The output frequency monitor minimum
(See note 1.)
unit can be set by the frequency reference
setting and display units (o1-03).
o1-03= 0: 0.01 Hz
o1-03= 1: 0.01% (100%: Max. frequency.)
o1-03= 2 to 39: 1 r/min (Set number of
poles.)
o1-03= 40 to 39999: Follow individual set
values.
Setting the attribute 16 speed scale
enables a further multiplication factor to be
set for o1-03= 2 to 39: 1 r/min.
08 Speed Reference Can be set and read in hexadecimal with 0 to max. 0000 Yes Yes Word
the frequency reference minimum unit as frequency
Rotational Speed
1.
Reference
The frequency reference minimum unit can
(See note 1.)
be set by the frequency reference setting
and display units (o1-03).
o1-03= 0: 0.01 Hz
o1-03= 1: 0.01% (100%: Max. frequency.)
o1-03= 2 to 39: 1 r/min (Set number of
poles.)
o1-03= 40 to 39999: Follow individual set
values.
enables a further multiplication factor to be
set for o1-03= 2 to 39: 1 r/min.
5-37
range
01 09 Current Actual Can be referenced in hexadecimal with the --- 0000 Yes No Word
output current monitor (U1-03) minimum
unit as 0.1 A.
Setting the attribute 17 current scale
enables a multiplication factor to be set.
0F Power Actual Can be referenced in hexadecimal with the --- 0000 Yes No Word
output power monitor (U1-08) minimum
unit as 1 W.
Setting the attribute 1A power scale
10 Input Voltage Can be referenced in hexadecimal with the --- 0000 Yes No Word
input voltage setting (E1-01) minimum unit
as 1 V.
Setting the attribute 1B voltage scale
11 Output Voltage Can be referenced in hexadecimal with the --- 0000 Yes No Word
output voltage monitor (U1-06) minimum
unit as 1 V.
Setting the attribute 1B voltage scale
12 Accel Time Can be set and read in hexadecimal with 0.0 to 2710 Yes Yes Word
the acceleration time 1 (C1-01) and 6,000.0 × Hex
deceleration time 1 (C1-02) minimum unit 103 ms (10.0 s)
as 1 ms. (0.00 to
600.00 ×
De ending on the acceleration/
Depending
103 ms)
13 Decel Time deceleration time unit (C1-01) setting, 2710 Yes Yes Word
numbers below 100 ms or 10 ms are Hex
truncated. (10.0 s)
Setting the attribute 1C time scale enables
a multiplication factor to be set.
14 Low Speed Limit Can be set and read in hexadecimal with 0 to 0000 Yes Yes Word
the frequency reference lower limit (d2-02) 109% of
(See note 1 and
and the frequency reference upper limit maximum
3.)
(d2-01) minimum unit as 1 ms. frequency
The minimum unit can be set by the
frequency reference setting and display
units (o1-03).
15 High Speed Limit 0 to 110% 0708 Yes Yes Word
o1-03= 2 to 39: 1 r/min
of Hex
(See note 1 and o1-03= Other than above: 0.1% (Maximum
maximum (1,800
3.) frequency: 100%)
frequency r/min)
enables a multiplication factor to be set for
o1-03= 2 to 39: 1 r/min.
16 Speed scale Speed data unit selection can be set and –15 to 15 00 Yes Yes Byte
read. The speed data unit value is (F1 to 0F
calculated as follows: hex)
Unit = 1 [r/min] x 1/2a
a: Speed scale set value
Set a negative value as its 2’s
complement.
17 Current scale Current data unit selection can be set and –15 to 15 00 Yes Yes Byte
read. The current data unit value is (F1 to 0F
Unit = 0.1 [A] x 1/2b
b: Current scale set value
complement.
5-38
range
01 1A Power scale Power data unit selection can be set and –15 to 15 00 Yes Yes Byte
read. The power data unit value is (F1 to 0F
Unit = 0.1 [W] x 1/2c
c: Power scale set value
complement.
1B Voltage scale Voltage data unit selection can be set and –15 to 15 00 Yes Yes Byte
read. The voltage data unit value is (F1 to 0F
Unit = 0.1 [V] x 1/2d
d: Voltage scale set value
complement.
1C Time scale Time data unit selection can be set and –15 to 15 00 Yes Yes Byte
read. The time data unit value is calculated (F1 to 0F
as follows: hex)
Unit = 0.1 [V] x 1/2e
e: Voltage scale set value
complement.
1D Reference From 00: Operate at B1-01 setting. --- 00 Yes No Byte
Net 01: Set B1-01 to “3” and operate with
DeviceNet.
Note 1. The Net Reference and Reference From Net functions cannot be changed during running.
Note 2. Under the DeviceNet protocol, the unit for the speed reference is always r/min. The number of
motor poles (2 to 39) must be set in parameter o1-03 (frequency reference setting and display
units) when using DeviceNet (open network).
Note 3. Cannot be changed during running.
D Communications Data Setting Examples

Example 1: Finding the communications data for outputting a frequency of 60 Hz with the following
conditions set.
Number of poles (o1-03): 4
Speed scale (attribute 16): 0
• Converting frequency to rotational speed:
Frequency x 120 / number of poles = 60 x 120/4 = 1,800 r/min
• Converting rotational speed to minimum unit:
Rotational speed / unit = 1,800 / (1 r/min x 1/20) = 1,800
• Converting communications data to hexadecimal: 1,800 (dec) = 708 (hex)
Example 2: Finding the communications data for outputting a frequency of 60 Hz with the following
condition set.
Frequency setting (o1-03): 0 (Cannot be set with DeviceNet protocol.)
• Converting frequency to minimum setting unit:
Frequency / minimum unit = 60 / 0.01 = 6,000
• Converting communications data to hexadecimal: 6,000 (dec) = 1,770 (hex)
Note With frequency, the speed scale has no effect.
5-39
Example 3: Finding the communications data for setting a one-minute acceleration time with the follow-
ing condition set.
Time scale (attribute 1C): –3
• Matching the acceleration time unit: 1 minute = 60 seconds = 60,000 ms
• Converting acceleration time to minimum unit:
Acceleration time / unit = 60,000 / (1 ms x 1/2–3) = 7,500
• Converting communications data to hexadecimal: 7,500 (dec) = 1D4C (hex)
D Communications Data Reference Example

In this example, the hexadecimal value BB8 that has been read is converted to frequency with the fol-
lowing conditions set.
Number of poles (o1-03): 4
Speed scale (attribute 16): 1
• Converting communications data to decimal: BB8 (hex) = 3,000 (dec)
• Converting from minimum unit to r/min:
Communications data x unit = 3,000 x (1 r/min x 1/21) = 1,500 (r/min)
5-5-9 Reading and Writing Parameters: Class 64 Hex

Inverter parameters can be read and written using explicit messages. Class 100 Dec (64 Hex) has been
provided with instances and attributes corresponding to each parameter in the Inverter. Send an explicit
message to the class, instance, or attribute of the parameter to be set as described below.
S Parameter Database
All parameters in the parameter database have been unified to 1-word (16-bit) data. Even settings of 0
and 1 will be treated as 1-word (16-bit) data in explicit messages.
Note When sending or receiving 1-word (16-bit) data in an explicit message, the leftmost and rightmost
bytes will be reversed. Accordingly, when reading or writing data, the attribute value will be in the
upper byte, the lower byte will contain the lower byte of the data, and the upper byte of the data will
be in the upper byte of the next word.
Communications line data is sent and received in the order of lower byte, then upper byte.
PLC internal processing data, such as when sending commands, are sent and received in the or-
der of upper byte, then lower byte.
S Parameter Read and Write Data

Read data and write data for parameters is calculated as shown below and then transmitted in hexade-
cimal.
• Convert to hexadecimal values with the function/parameter minimum setting unit taken as 1.
Example: To set a frequency reference of 60 Hz when the minimum setting unit is 0.01 Hz.
60/0.01 = 6000 → 1770 Hex
5-40
• Negative numbers are expressed as two’s complements.
Example: To set a frequency reference bias (n061) of –100% when the minimum setting unit is 1%:
100/1 = 100 Dec = 0064 Hex, –100% → FF9C Hex
0064 Hex= 00000000011001 00

Bit reversal
FF9B Hex= 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
FF9C Hex= 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 +1
• If the original data is already in hexadecimal, it is transmitted as is.

• Set bits that are not used to “0.”
• Do not set data for unused registers.
S Enabling Parameter Data Using the ENTER Command

To enable parameter data that has been received, send an ENTER command as shown in the following
table to either store or not store the parameters in EEPROM. To enable a series of data for more than
one transmission, send only one ENTER command after sending all of the data.
Data type Transmission Inverter Operation Remarks
ENTER Write 0000 as follows: Previously received Used to store data even
command that Class: 100 Dec (64 Hex) parameter setting data is after a power interruption.
writes Instance: 255 Dec (FF Hex) stored in EEPROM.
parameters to Attribute: 253 Hex (FD Hex) Note: The maximum
EEPROM number of write operations
that can be performed to
EEPROM is 100,000.
ENTER Write 0000 as follows: Previously received If there is frequent rewriting
command that Class: 100 Dec (64 Hex) parameter setting data is of data, do not send
does not write Instance: 255 Dec (FF Hex) enabled as operating data ENTER commands each
parameters to Attribute: 221 Hex (DD Hex) without storing it to time because of the limit to
EEPROM EEPROM. the number of times
EEPROM can be written.
Be sure to send an ENTER
command that writes data
to EEPROM once before
the power supply is
interrupted.
S Parameter Classes, Instances, and Attributes

Refer to 5-6 3G3RV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes, 5-7 3G3PV Register Num-
bers, Classes, Instances, and Attributes, and 5-8 3G3FV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and
Attributes.
5-41
5-6 3G3RV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and

Attributes
5-6-1 Inputting Control/Frequency (Read/Write)

Register No. Contents
(Hex)
0000 Reserved
0001 Frequency reference
Bit 0 Run/stop command 1: Run 0: Stop
Bit 1 Reverse/stop command 1: Reverse 0: Stop
Bit 2 Multi-function input command 3
Bit 7 Not used.
Bit 8 External error 1: Error (EFO)
Bit 9 Error reset 1: Reset command
Bits 10 to 15 Not used.
0002 Frequency reference (Set units using parameter o1-03.)
0003 to 0005 Not used.
0006 PID target value
0007 Analog output 1 setting (–11 V/–726 Dec to 11 V/726 Dec)
0008 Analog output 2 setting (–11 V/–726 Dec to 11 V/726 Dec)
0009 Multi-function contact output setting
Bit 0 Contact output (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 Contact output (terminals M3-M4 or P1-PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 Contact output (terminals M5-M6 or P2-PC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6 Set error contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7. 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7 Error contact (terminal MA-MC) 1: ON 0: OFF
000A to 000E Not used.
000F Reference selection settings
Bit 0 Not used.
Bit 1 PID target value (register 0006H) 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Note Set all unused bits to 0.
5-42
5-6-2 Inverter Monitoring Functions (Read)

(Hex)
0020 Inverter status
Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1 Reverse operation 1: Reverse operation 0: Forward operation or
stopped
Bit 2 Inverter startup complete 1: Completed 2: Not completed
Bit 3 Error 1: Error
Bit 4 Data setting error 1: Error
Bit 5 Multi-function contact output (terminals M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6 Multi-function contact output (terminals M3-M4 or P1-PC) 1: ON 0:
OFF
Bit 7 Multi-function contact output (terminals M5-M6 or P2-PC) 1: ON 0:
OFF
0021 Error details
Bit 0 Overcurrent (OC), ground fault (GF)
Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Bit 2 Inverter overload (OL2)
Bit 3 Inverter overheat (OH1, OH2)
Bit 4 Injection brake transistor resistance overheat (rr, rH)
Bit 5 Fuse blown (PUF)
Bit 6 PID feedback reference lost (FbL)
Bit 7 External error (EF, EFO)
Bit 8 Hardware error (CPF)
Bit 9 Motor overload (OL1) or overtorque 1 (OL3) detected
Bit 10 PG broken wire detected (PGO), overspeed (OS), speed deviation
(DEV)
Bit 11 Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Bit 12 Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply error (UV2),
inrush prevention circuit error (UV3)
Bit 13 Missing output phase (LF)
Bit 14 RS-422A/485 communications error (CE)
Bit 15 Operator disconnected (OPR)
0022 Data link status
Bit 0 Writing data
Bits 1 and 2 Not used.
Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors
Bit 4 Data integrity error
0023 Frequency reference Monitors U1-01 (Unit set with o1-03.)
0024 Output frequency Monitors U1-02 (Unit set with o1-03.)
0025 Output voltage Monitors U1-06 (0.1-V units)
reference
5-43

(Hex)
0026 Output current Monitors U1-03 (Inverters of 7.5 kW or less: 0.01-A units, Inverters
of 11 kW or more: 0.1-A units)
0027 Output power Monitors U1-08 (0.1-kW units)
0028 Torque reference Monitors U1-09 (0.1 units, 100% = motor’s rated torque)
Note Only enabled for vector control.
0029 to 002A Not used.
002A Not used.
002B Sequence input status
Bit 0 Multi-function input terminal S1 1: ON 0: OFF
002C Inverter status
Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating
Bit 1 Zero speed 1: Zero speed
Bit 2 Frequency matching 1: Matched
Bit 3 User-defined speed matching 1: Matched
Bit 4 Frequency detection 1 1: Output frequency ≤ L4-01
Bit 5 Frequency detection 2 1: Output frequency ≥ L4-01
Bit 6 Inverter startup completed 1: Startup completed
Bit 7 Low voltage detection 1: Detected
Bit 8 Baseblock 1: Inverter output baseblock
Bit 9 Frequency reference mode 1: Not communications
0: Communications
Bit 10 Run command mode 1: Not communications 0: Communications
Bit 11 Overtorque detection 1: Detected
Bit 12 Frequency reference lost 1: Lost
Bit 13 Retrying error 1: Retrying
Bit 14 Fault. (including RS-422A/485 communications time-out) 1: fault
occurred
Bit 15 Communications time-out 1: Timed out
002D Multi-function output status
Bit 0 Multi-function contact output (terminals M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 Multi-function contact output (terminals M3-M4 or P1-PC): 1: ON 0:
OFF
Bit 2 Multi-function contact output (terminals M5-M6 or P2-PC): 1: ON 0:
OFF
002E to 0030 Not used.
0031 Main circuit DC Monitors U1-07 (1-V units)
voltage
5-44

(Hex)
0038 PID feedback 1% = 10; 100% = Input corresponding to max. output frequency;
quantity without sign
0039 PID input quantity 1% = 10; 100% = Max. output frequency; without sign
003A PID output quantity 1% = 10; 100% = Max. output frequency; without sign
003B CPU software number
003C Flash software number
003D Communications error details
Bit 0 CRC error
Bit 1 Invalid data length
Bit 2 Not used.
Bit 3 Parity error
Bit 4 Overrun error
Bit 5 Framing error
Bit 6 Time-out
003E kVA setting
003F Control method
0040 Frequency reference Monitors U1-01; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03; with sign)
0041 Output frequency Monitors U1-02; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03; with sign)
0042 Output current Monitors U1-03; Inverters of 7.5 kW or less: 0.01-A units,
Inverters of 11 kW or more: 0.1-A units
0043 Control method Monitors U1-04; set in A1-02
0044 Motor speed Monitors U1-05; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03; with sign)
0045 Output voltage Monitors U1-06; 0.1-V units
0046 Main circuit DC voltage Monitors U1-07; 1-V units
0047 Output power Monitors U1-08; 0.1-kW units (with sign)
0048 Torque reference Monitors U1-09; 0.1%-kW units (100% = motor’s rated
torque; with sign)
0049 Input terminal status Monitors U1-10; 1: ON. Bits 0 to 6 correspond to terminals
S1 to S7.
004A Output terminal status Monitors U1-11
Bit 0 Terminals M1 and M2; 1: ON
Bit 1 Terminals M3 (P1) and M4 (PC); 1: ON
Bit 2 Terminals M5 (P2) and M6 (PC); 1: ON
Bit 7 Terminals MA and MC; 1: ON
5-45

(Hex)
004B Operating
g status Monitors U1-12
Bit 0 During RUN
Bit 1 Zero speed
Bit 2 Forward/reverse (1: Reverse operation)
Bit 3 During fault reset input
Bit 4 Frequency agree
Bit 5 Operation ready
Bit 6 Alarm (Minor fault)
Bit 7 Fault
004C Cumulative operation time Monitors U1-13; 1-hr units
004D FLASH ID software No. Monitors U1-14
004E Frequency reference Monitors U1-15; 0.1% units (100% = 10 V; with sign for
(voltage): Terminal A1 input ± voltage setting)
value
004F Multi-function analog input: Monitors U1-16; 0.1% units (100%=20 mA or 100% = 10 V;
Terminal A2 input value with sign for ± voltage setting)
0051 Motor secondary current Monitors U1-18; 0.1% units (motor’s rated secondary
current = 100%; with sign)
0052 Motor excitation current Monitors U1-19; 0.1% units (motor’s rated secondary
0053 Output frequency after a soft Monitors U1-20; 0.01-Hz units (with sign)
start
0054 Input to speed control loop Monitors U1-21; 0.01% (max. frequency = 100%; with sign)
0055 Output from speed control Monitors U1-22; 0.01% units (motor’s rated secondary
loop current = 100%; with sign)
0057 PID feedback Monitors U1-24; 0.01% units (input corresponding to max.
frequency = 100%; with sign)
0059 Voltage reference for Monitors U1-26; 0.1-V units (200 (400) VAC = 100%; with
secondary current sign)
005A Voltage reference for Monitors U1-27; 0.1-V units (200 (400) VAC = 100%; with
excitation current sign)
005B CPU ID Monitors U1-28
005F q-axis ACR output Monitors U1-32; 0.1% units (motor’s rated secondary
0060 d-axis ACR output Monitors U1-33; 0.1% units (motor’s rated secondary
0061 OPE error parameter Monitors U1-34; outputs parameter
0063 PID input quantity Monitors U1-36; 0.01% units (max. frequency = 100%; with
sign)
0064 PID output quantity Monitors U1-37; 0.01% units (max. frequency = 100%; with
sign)
0065 PID reference Monitors U1-38; 0.01% units (max. frequency = 100%)
5-46

(Hex)
0066 RS-422A/485 Monitors U1-39
i i
communications error Bit 0 CRC error
Bit 2 Not used.
Bit 3 Parity error
Bit 4 Overrun error
Bit 5 Framing error
Bit 6 Time-out
0068 Fan operating time Monitors U1-40; 1-hr units
0080 Current fault Monitors U2-01
Code Error Code Error Code Error
display display display
01 PUF 0E OL4 1C LF
02 UV1 0F RR 1D OH3
03 UV2 10 RH 1E OPR
04 UV3 11 EF3 1F ERR
06 GF 12 EF4 20 OH4
07 OC 13 EF5 22 BUS
08 OV 14 EF6 25 CF
09 OH 15 EF7 27 EF0
0A OH1 18 OS 28 FBL
0B OL1 19 DEV 29 UL3
0C OL2 1A PGO 2A UL4
0D OL3 1B PF 2B OL7
0081 Last fault Monitors U2-02 (same codes as U2-01)
0082 Fault frequency reference Monitors U2-03; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03; with sign)
0083 Fault output reference Monitors U2-04; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03; with sign)
0084 Fault output current Monitors U2-05; Inverters of 7.5 kW or less: 0.01-A units,
0085 Fault motor speed Monitors U2-06; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03; with sign)
0086 Fault output voltage reference Monitors U2-07; 0.1-V units
0087 Fault main circuit DC voltage Monitors U2-08; 1-V units
0088 Fault output power Monitors U2-09; 0.1-kW units (with sign)
0089 Fault torque reference Monitors U2-10; 0.1% units (100% = motor’s rated torque;
with sign)
008A Fault input terminal status Monitors U2-11 (same contents as U1-10)
008B Fault output terminal status Monitors U2-12 (same contents as U1-11)
008C Fault operating status Monitors U2-13 (same contents as U1-12)
008D Fault cumulative operation Monitors U2-14; 1-hr units
time
0090 (0800) Content of last fault Monitors U3-01 (same codes as U2-01)
0091 (0801) Content of 2nd prior fault Monitors U3-02 (same codes as U2-01)
0092 (0802) Content of 3rd prior fault Monitors U3-03 (same codes as U2-01)
0093 (0803) Content of 4th prior fault Monitors U3-04 (same codes as U2-01)
5-47

(Hex)
0094 (080A) Cumulative operation time Monitors U3-05; 1-hr units
since last fault
0095 (080B) Cumulative operation time Monitors U3-06; 1-hr units
since 2nd prior fault
0096 (080C) Cumulative operation time Monitors U3-07; 1-hr units
since 3rd prior fault
0097 (080D) Cumulative operation time Monitors U3-08; 1-hr units
since 4th prior fault
0804 Content of 5th prior fault Monitors U3-09 (same codes as U2-01) (See note.)
080E Cumulative operation time Monitors U3-15; 1-hr units (See note.)
080F Cumulative operation time Monitors U3-16; 1-hr units (See note.)
0810 Cumulative operation time Monitors U3-17; 1-hr units (See note.)
Note U3-09 to U3-20 are not supported for Asian models. Register No. 0800 Hex to 0813 Hex are not
supported for Asian models.
5-6-3 Parameter Reading and Writing

The following tables show the SYSDRIVE 3G3RV Inverter parameters and the corresponding register
numbers. Write and read the various parameters with “1” as the minimum setting unit. Negative num-
bers are expressed as two’s complement. If the setting unit is in hexadecimal, there is no need to con-
vert it.
When writing data in parameters, be sure to send an enter command to enable the written data. Unless
the enter command is transmitted, the data will not be enabled and the Inverter may not start.
5-48
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

S Parameters for Initialize Mode
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Parameter Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Changes
No. (Hex)
No range unit
nit setting d ring
during

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Instance Attribute operation

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
A1-00 0100 01 00 Language selection for 0 to 6 1 1 Yes
Digital Operator display

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
A1-01 0101 01 01 Parameter access level 0 to 2 1 2 Yes

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
A1-02 0102 01 02 Control method selection 0 to 2 1 0 No

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
A1-03 0103 01 03 Initialize 0 to 3,330 1 0 No

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
A1-04 0104 01 04 Password 0 to 9,999 1 0 No
A1-05 0105 01 05 Password setting 0 to 9,999 1 0 No
A2-01 to 0106 to 01 06 to 25 User-parameter settings 0180 to 1 --- No
A2-32 0125 0510
Set the
register
numbers for
b1-01 to
o2-11.
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
S Application Parameters
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Parameter
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
ÁÁÁÁÁ
No. (Hex)
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Class 64 (Hex)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Instance Attribute
Name Setting
range
Setting
unit
nit
Default
setting
Change
d ring
during
operation
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
b1-01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
b1-02 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0180
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0181 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁÁ
80
81
Reference selection
Operation method
0 to 4
0 to 3
1
1
1
1
No
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
selection
b1-03 0182 01 82 Stopping method 0 to 3 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b1-04 0183 01 83 Prohibition of reverse 0 or 2 (See 1 0 No
operation note 6.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
b1-06
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0185
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
85 Read sequence input
twice
0 or 1 1 1 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b1-07 0186 01 86 Operation selection after 0 or 1 1 0 No
switching to remote
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
mode
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b1-08 0187 01 87 Run command selection 0 or 1 1 0 No
in programming modes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
b2-01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0189
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
89 Zero speed level (DC
injection braking starting
frequency)
0.0 to 10.0 0.1 Hz 0.5 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
b2-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
018A
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
8A DC injection braking
current
0 to 100 1% 50 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b2-03 018B 01 8B DC injection braking time 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.00 No
at start 10.00
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
b2-04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
018C
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
8C DC Injection braking time
at stop
0.00 to
10.00
0.01 s 0.50 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b3-01 0191 01 91 Speed search selection 0 to 3 1 2 (See No
(current detection or note 1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
speed calculation)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b3-02 0192 01 92 Speed search operating 0 to 200 1% 120 (See No
current (current note 1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
detection)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b3-03 0193 01 93 Speed search 0.1 to 10.0 0.1 s 2.0 No
deceleration time
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(current detection)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b3-05 0195 01 95 Speed search wait time 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.2 No
(current detection or 20.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
speed calculation)
5-49
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Parameter
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Change
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
No. (Hex) range unit setting during
Instance Attribute
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
operation
b4-01 01A3 01 A3 Timer function ON-delay 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
time 3000.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(See note
5.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b4-02 01A4 01 A4 Timer function OFF-delay 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
time 3000.0
(See note
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
5.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b5-01 01A5 01 A5 PID control mode 0 to 4 1 0 No
selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
b5-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01A6
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
A6 Proportional gain (P) 0.00 to
25.00
0.01 1.00 Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b5-03 01A7 01 A7 Integral (I) time 0.0 to 0.1 s 1.0 Yes
360.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
b5-04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01A8
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
A8 Integral (I) limit 0.0 to
100.0
0.1% 100.0 Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b5-05 01A9 01 A9 Derivative (D) time 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.00 Yes
10.00
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
b5-06
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01AA
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
AA PID limit 0.0 to
100.0
0.1% 100.0 Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b5-07 01AB 01 AB PID offset adjustment –100.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
100.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
b5-08
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01AC
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
AC PID primary delay time
constant
0.00 to
10.00
0.01 s 0.00 Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b5-09 01AD 01 AD PID output 0 or 1 1 0 No
characteristics selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
b5-10
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
b5-11 ÁÁÁÁ
01AE
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
01AF ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁÁ
AE
AF
PID output gain
PID reverse output
0.0 to 25.0
0 or 1
0.1
1
1.0
0
No
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
selection
b5-12 01B0 01 B0 Selection of PID 0 to 2 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
feedback command loss
detection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b5-13 01B1 01 B1 PID feedback command 0 to 100 1% 0 No
loss detection level
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
b5-14
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01B2
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
B2 PID feedback command
loss detection time
0.0 to 25.5 0.1 s 1.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b5-15 01B3 01 B3 PID sleep function 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
operation level 400.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b5-16 01B4 01 B4 PID sleep operation 0.0 to 25.5 0.1 s 0.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
delay time
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b5-17 01B5 01 B5 Accel/decel time for PID 0.0 to 25.5 0.1 s 0.0 No
reference
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b5-18 01DC 01 DC PID set point selection 0 or 1 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(See note 5.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b5-19 01DD 01 DD PID set point (See note 0.0 to 0.1% 0.0 No
5.) 100.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b6-01 01B6 01 B6 Dwell frequency at start 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
400.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b6-02 01B7 01 B7 Dwell time at start 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 s 0.0 No
b6-03 01B8 01 B8 Dwell frequency at stop 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
400.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b6-04 01B9 01 B9 Dwell time at stop 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 s 0.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b8-01 01CC 01 CC Energy-saving mode 0 or 1 1 0 No
selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
b8-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01CD
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
CD Energy-saving gain 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 0.7 (See
note 2.)
Yes
5-50
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Parameter
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Instance Attribute
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
operation
b8-03 01CE 01 CE Energy-saving filter time 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.50 (See Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
constant 10.0 note 3.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b8-04 01CF 01 CF Energy-saving coefficient 0.00 to 0.01 Depends No
655.00 on
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(See note capacity.
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
4.)
b8-05 01D0 01 D0 Power detection filter 0 to 2000 1 ms 20 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
time constant
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b8-06 01D1 01 D1 Search operation voltage 0 to 100 1% 0 No
limiter
Note 1. When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to default settings. (The V/F control
default setting is given above.)
Note 2. The default setting is 0.1 for V/f control with PG.
Note 3. The default setting is 2.00 s for Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW or more.
Note 4. The same capacity as the Inverter can be set by initializing this parameter.
Note 5. The setting range for Asian models is 0.0 to 300.0.
Note 6. The setting range for Asian models is 0 to 1.
S Tuning Parameters
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Parameter ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
No. (Hex)
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting
range
Setting
unit
nit
Default
setting
Change
d ring
during
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C1-01 0200 02 00 Acceleration time 1 0.0
0 0 to
o 0.1 s
0 10.0
00 Yes
6000 0
6000.0 (S t with
(Set ith
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C1-02 0201 02 01 Deceleration time 1 Yes
(Set with C1-10 )
C1-10.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C1-03 0202 02 02 Acceleration time 2 C1-10.)
C1 10.) Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C1-05
ÁÁÁÁ
C1-06 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0204
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0205 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
02
ÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁ
02 ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
05
Acceleration time 3
Deceleration time 3
No
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C1-07 0206 02 06 Acceleration time 4 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C1-08 0207 02 07 Deceleration time 4 No
C1-09 0208 02 08 Deceleration Stop Time No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C1-10
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0209
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
02
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
09 Accel/decel time setting
unit
0 or 1 1 1 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C1-11 020A 02 0A Accel/decel time 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
switching frequency 400.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C2-01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
020B
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
02
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
0B S-curve characteristic
time at acceleration start
0.00 to
2.50
0.01 s 0.20 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C2-02 020C 02 0C S-curve characteristic 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.20 No
time at acceleration end 2.50
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C2-03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
020D
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
02
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
0D S-curve characteristic
time at deceleration start
0.00 to
2.50
0.01 s 0.20 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C2-04 020E 02 0E S-curve characteristic 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.00 No
time at deceleration end 2.50
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C3-01 020F 02 0F Slip compensation gain 0.0 to 2.5 0.1 0.0 (See Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
note 1.)
C3-02 0210 02 10 Slip compensation 0 to 10000 1 ms 2000 (See No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
primary delay time note 1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C3-03 0211 02 11 Slip compensation limit 0 to 250 1% 200 No
5-51
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Parameter
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Instance Attribute
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
operation
C3-04 0212 02 12 Slip compensation 0 or 1 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
selection during
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
regeneration
C3-05 0213 02 13 Output voltage limit 0 or 1 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
operation selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C4-01 0215 02 15 Torque compensation 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 Yes
gain 2.50
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C4-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0216
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
16 Torque compensation
primary delay time
constant
0 to 10000 1 ms 200 (See
note 1.)
No
C4-03 0217 02 17 Starting torque value 0.0 to 200.0 0.1% 0.0 No

(forward) (See note 4.)
C4-04 0218 02 18 Starting torque value –200.0 to 0.1% 0.0 No
(reverse) (See note 4.) 0.0
C4-05 0219 02 19 Starting torque time 0 to 200 1 ms 10 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
constant (See note 4.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C5-01 021B 02 1B ASR proportional (P) 0.00 to 0.01 0.20 Yes
gain 1 300.00
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C5-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
021C
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1C ASR integral (I) time 1 0.000 to
10.000
0.001 s 0.200 Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C5-03 021D 02 1D ASR proportional (P) 0.00 to 0.01 0.02 Yes
gain 2 300.00
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C5-04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
021E
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1E ASR integral (I) time 2 0.000 to
10.000
0.001 s 0.050 Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C5-05 021F 02 1F ASR limit 0.0 to 20.0 0.1% 5.0 No
C6-01 0223 02 23 CT/VT selection 0 or 1 1 1 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C6-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0224
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
24 Carrier frequency
selection
0 to F 1 Depends
on capac-
ity.
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C6-03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0225
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
25 Carrier frequency upper
limit
2.0 to 15.0
(See notes
2 and 3.)
0.1 kHz Depends
on capac-
ity.
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C6-04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0226
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
26 Carrier frequency lower
limit
0.4 to 15.0
(See notes
2 and 3.)
0.1 kHz Depends
on capac-
ity.
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C6-05
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0227
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
27 Carrier frequency
proportional gain
00 to 99
(See note
3.)
1 00 No
Note 1. When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to default settings. (The V/f control
Note 2. The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
Note 3. These parameters can be monitored or set only when 1 is set for C6-01 and F is set for C6-02.
Note 4. These parameters are not supported by the Asian models.
5-52
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

S Reference Parameters
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ Á
Parameter Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Change
No. (Hex)
No range unit
nit setting d ring
during


d1-01 0280 02 80 Frequency reference 1 0 to
o max.
a 0 0 Hz
0.01 0.00 Yes
d1-02 0281 02 81 Frequency reference 2 output
t t fre-
f (S t with
(Set ith 0.00 Yes

quency o1-03 )
o1-03.)
d1-03 0282 02 82 Frequency reference 3 (See note 0.00 Yes

d1-04 0283 02 83 Frequency reference 4 1.) 0.00 Yes

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
d1-05 0284 02 84 Frequency reference 5 0.00 Yes

ÁÁÁÁ
d1-08
ÁÁÁÁ
d1-09ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0287
ÁÁÁÁ
0288 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
02
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
02 ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
87
ÁÁÁÁ
88ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Frequency reference 8
0.00
0.00
Yes
Yes

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
d1-10 028B 02 8B Frequency reference 10 0.00 Yes

d1-11 028C 02 8C Frequency reference 11 0.00 Yes

d1-12 028D 02 8D Frequency reference 12 0.00 Yes
d1-13 028E 02 8E Frequency reference 13 0.00 Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
d1-14
ÁÁÁÁ
d1-15ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
028F
ÁÁÁÁ
0290 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
02
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
02 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
8F
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
90
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
0.00
0.00
Yes
Yes


d1-17 0292 02 92 Jog frequency reference 6.00 Yes
d2-01 0289 02 89 Frequency reference up- 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 No

per limit 110.0

d2-02 028A 02 8A Frequency reference 0.0 to 0.1% 0.0 No
lower limit 110.0
ÁÁÁÁ
d2-03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0293
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
02
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
93
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Master speed reference
lower limit
0.0 to
110.0
0.1% 0.0 No

d3-01 0294 02 94 Jump frequency 1 0.0
0 0 to
o 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
400 0
400.0

d3-02 0295 02 95 Jump frequency 2 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
d3-04
ÁÁÁÁ
d4-01ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0297
ÁÁÁÁ
0298 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
02
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
02 ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
97
ÁÁÁÁ
98ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Jump frequency width
Frequency reference
0.0 to 20.0
0 or 1
0.1 Hz
1
1.0
0
No
No

hold function selection
d4-02 0299 02 99 + – Speed limits 0 to 100 1% 10 No
ÁÁÁÁ
d6-01
ÁÁÁÁ
d6-02ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
02A0
ÁÁÁÁ
02A1 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
02
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
02 ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
A0
ÁÁÁÁ
A1ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Field weakening level
Field frequency
0 to 100
0.0 to
400.0
1%
0.1 Hz
80
0.0
No
No
Note Values exceeding the max. output frequency (E1-04 and E3-02) cannot be set. Set the motor con-
stant parameters first.
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Parameter ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Register ÁÁÁÁ
S Motor Constant Parameters
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
No. (Hex)
No range unit
nit setting d ring
during
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E1-01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0300
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
00 Input voltage setting 155 to 255
(155 to
510) (See
1V 200 (400)
(See note
1.)
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
note 1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E1-03 0302 03 02 V/f pattern selection 0 to F 1 F No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E1-04 0303 03 03 Max. output frequency 40.0 to 0.1 Hz 50.0 (60.0) No
400.0 (See (See note
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
note 5.) 8.)
5-53
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Parameter
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Instance Attribute
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
operation
E1-05 0304 03 04 Max. voltage 0.0 to 0.1 V 200.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
255.0 (0.0 (400.0)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
to 510.0) (See note
(See note 1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E1-06 0305 03 05 Base frequency 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 50.0 (60.0) No
400.0 (See note
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
8.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E1-07 0306 03 06 Mid. output frequency 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 3.0 No
400.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E1-08
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0307
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
07 Mid. output frequency
voltage
0.0 to
255.0 (0.0
to 510.0)
0.1 V 15.0 (30.0)
(See note
1 and 3.)
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(See note
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1.)
E1-09 0308 03 08 Min. output frequency 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 1.5 (See No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
400.0 note 3.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E1-10 0309 03 09 Min. output frequency 0.0 to 0.1 V 9.0 (18.0) No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
voltage 255.0 (0.0 (See note
to 510.0) 1 and 3.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(See note
1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E1-11
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
030A
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
0A Mid. output frequency 2 0.0 to
400.0
0.1 Hz 0.0 (See
note 6.)
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E1-12 030B 03 0B Mid. output frequency 0.0 to 0.1 V 0.0 (See No
voltage 2 255.0 (0.0 note 6.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
to 510.0)
(See note
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E1-13 030C 03 0C Base voltage 0.0 to 0.1 V 0.0 (See No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
255.0 (0.0 note 4.)
to 510.0)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(See note
1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E2-01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
030E
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
0E Motor rated current 0.32 to
6.40 (See
note 2.)
0.01 A Depends
on capac-
ity.
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E2-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
030F
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
0F Motor rated slip 0.00 to
20.00
0.01 Hz Depends
on capac-
ity.
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E2-03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0310
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
10 Motor no-load current Depends
on capac-
0.01 A Depends
on capac-
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ity. ity.
E2-04 0311 03 11 Number of motor poles 2 to 48 1 pole 4 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E2-05
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0312
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
12 Motor line-to-line resis-
tance
0.000 to
65.000
0.001 Ω Depends
on capac-
ity.
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E2-06
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0313
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
13 Motor leak inductance 0.0 to 40.0 0.1% Depends
on capac-
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ity.
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E2-07 0314 03 14 Motor iron saturation co- 0.00 to 0.01 0.50 No
efficient 1 0.50
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E2-08
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0315
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
15 Motor iron saturation co-
efficient 2
0.00 to
0.75
0.01 0.75 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E2-10 0317 03 17 Motor iron loss for torque 0 to 65535 1W Depends No
compensation on capac-
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ity.
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E2-11 0318 03 18 Motor rated output 0.00 to 0.01 kW Depends No
650.00 on capac-
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ity.
5-54
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Parameter
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Instance Attribute
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
operation
E3-01 0319 03 19 Motor 2 control method 0 to 2 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E3-02 031A 03 1A Motor 2 max. output fre- 40.0 to 0.1 Hz 50.0 (60.0) No
quency (FMAX) 400.0 (See (See note
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
note 5.) 8.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E3-03 031B 03 1B Motor 2 max. voltage 0.0 to 0.1 V 200.0 No
(VMAX) 255.0 (0.0 (400.0)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
to 510.0) (See note
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(See note 1.)
1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E3-04 031C 03 1C Motor 2 max. voltage fre- 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 50.0 (60.0) No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
quency (FA) 400.0 (See note
8.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E3-05 031D 03 1D Motor 2 mid. output fre- 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 3.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
quency 1 (FB) 400.0
E3-06 031E 03 1E Motor 2 mid. output fre- 0.0 to 0.1 V 15.0 (30.0) No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
quency voltage 1 (VC) 255.0 (0.0
to 510.0)
(See note
(See note
1 and 3.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E3-07 031F 03 1F Motor 2 min. output fre- 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 1.5 (See No
quency (FMIN) 400.0 note 3.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E3-08
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0320
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
20 Motor 2 min. output fre-
quency voltage (VMIN)
0.0 to
255.0 (0.0
to 510.0)
0.1 V 9.0 (18.0)
(See note
1 and 3.)
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(See note
1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E4-01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0321
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
21 Motor 2 rated current 0.32 to
6.40 (See
note 2.)
0.01 A Depends
on capac-
ity.
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E4-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0322
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
22 Motor 2 rated slip 0.00 to
20.00
0.01 Hz Depends
on capac-
ity.
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E4-03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0323
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
23 Motor 2 no-load current 0.00 to
1.89 (See
note 7.)
0.01 A Depends
on capac-
ity.
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E4-04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0324
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
24 Motor 2 number of poles
(number of poles)
2 to 48 1 pole 4 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E4-05 0325 03 25 Motor 2 line-to-line resis- 0.000 to 0.001 Ω Depends No
tance 65.000 on capac-
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ity.
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E4-06 0326 03 26 Motor 2 leak inductance 0.0 to 40.0 0.1% Depends No
on capac-
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ity.
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E4-07 0327 03 27 Motor 2 rated capacity 0.40 to 0.01 kW Depends No
650.00 on capac-
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ity.
Note 1. Values in parentheses are for 400-V-class Inverters.

Note 2. The setting range is 10% to 200% of the Inverter’s rated output current. The values for a
200-V-class 0.4-kW Inverter are given above.
default settings are given above.)
Note 4. E1-13 will be the same value as E1-05 after autotuning.
Note 5. The upper setting limit will be 150.0 Hz when C6-01 is set to 0.
Note 6. The settings of E1-11 and E1-12 are ignored if set to 0.0.
5-55
Note 7. If multi-function input H1- is set to 16 (motor 2), the default setting will depend upon the
Inverter capacity. The value for a 200-V-class 0.4-kW Inverter is given.
Note 8. Values in parentheses are for Asian model Inverters.
S Option Parameters
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Parameter ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
No. (Hex)
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
range
Setting
unit
nit
Default
setting
Change
d ring
during
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F1-01 0380 03 80 PG constant 0 to 60000 1 1024 No
(600) (See
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
note.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F1-02 0381 03 81 Operation selection at PG 0 to 3 1 1 No
open circuit (PGO)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
F1-03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0382
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
82 Operation selection at
overspeed (OS)
0 to 3 1 1 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F1-04 0383 03 83 Operation selection at 0 to 3 1 3 No
deviation
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
F1-05
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
F1-06 ÁÁÁÁ
0384
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0385 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁÁ
84
85
PG rotation
PG division rate (PG pulse
0 or 1
1 to 132
1
1
0
1
No
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
monitor)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F1-07 0386 03 86 Integral value during accel/ 0 or 1 1 0 No
decel enable/disable
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F1-08 0387 03 87 Overspeed detection level 0 to 120 1% 115 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F1-09 0388 03 88 Overspeed detection delay 0.0 to 2.0 0.1 s 1.0 No
time
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
F1-10
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0389
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
89 Excessive speed deviation
detection level
0 to 50 1% 10 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F1-11 038A 03 8A Excessive speed deviation 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 s 0.5 No
detection delay time
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
F1-12
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
F1-13 ÁÁÁÁ
038B
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
038C ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁÁ
8B
8C
Number of PG gear teeth 1
Number of PG gear teeth 2
0 to 1000
0 to 1000
1
1
0
0
No
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F1-14 038D 03 8D PG open-circuit detection 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 s 2.0 No
time
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
F4-01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0391
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
91 Channel 1 monitor selec-
tion
1 to 40 1 2 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F4-02 0392 03 92 Channel 1 gain 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 Yes
2.50
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
F4-03
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0393
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁÁ 93 Channel 2 monitor selec- 1 to 40 1 3 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
tion
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F4-04 0394 03 94 Channel 2 gain 0.00 to 0.01 0.50 Yes
2.50
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
F4-05
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0395
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
95 Channel 1 output monitor
bias
–10.0 to
10.0
0.1 0.0 Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F4-06 0396 03 96 Channel 2 output monitor –10.0 to 0.1 0.0 Yes
bias 10.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F4-07 0397 03 97 Analog output signal level 0 or 1 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
for channel 1
F4-08 0398 03 98 Analog output signal level 0 or 1 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
for channel 2
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F5-01 0399 03 99 Not used. --- --- 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F5-02 039A 03 9A Not used. --- --- 1 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F5-03 039B 03 9B Not used. --- --- 2 No
F5-04 039C 03 9C Not used. --- --- 4 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
F5-05
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
F5-06 ÁÁÁÁ
039D
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
039E ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁÁ
9D
9E
Not used.
Not used.
---
---
---
---
6
37
No
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F5-07 039F 03 9F Not used. --- --- 0F No
5-56
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Parameter
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Instance Attribute
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
operation
F5-08 03A0 03 A0 Not used. --- --- 0F No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
F5-09
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
F6-01 ÁÁÁÁ
03A1
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
03A2 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁÁ
A1
A2
Not used.
DeviceNet fault operation
---
0 to 3
---
1
0
1
No
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F6-02 03A3 03 A3 Communications external 0 or 1 1 0 No
fault input detection meth-
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
od selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F6-03 03A4 03 A4 Communications external 0 to 3 1 1 No
fault input operation selec-
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
tion
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F6-04 03A5 03 A5 Not used. --- --- 0 No
F6-05 03A6 03 A6 Display unit selection for 0 or 1 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
current monitor
Note Values in parentheses are for Asian model Inverters.
S External Terminal Function Parameters

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Parameter
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Register
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
No. (Hex)
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Class 64 (Hex)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Instance Attribute
Name Setting
range
Setting
unit
nit
Default
setting
Change
d ring
during
operation
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
H1-01
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0400
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁ 00 Terminal S3 function 0 to 68 1 24 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H1-02 0401 04 01 Terminal S4 function 0 to 68 1 14 No
selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H1-03 0402 04 02 Terminal S5 function 0 to 68 1 3 (0) (See No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
selection note 1.)
H1-04 0403 04 03 Terminal S6 function 0 to 68 1 4 (3) (See No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
H1-05 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0404 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁ
04
selection
Terminal S7 function 0 to 68 1
note 1.)
6 (4) (See No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
selection note 1.)
H2-01 040B 04 0B Terminal M1-M2 Select 0 to 38 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
H2-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
040C
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
0C Terminal M3-M4 (P1)
function select
0 to 38 1 1 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H2-03 040D 04 0D Terminal M5-M6 (P2) 0 to 38 1 2 No
function select
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
H3-01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0410
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
10 Signal select terminal A1
(voltage) (See note 4.)
0 or 1 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H3-02 0411 04 11 Gain (terminal A1) 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
1000.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H3-03 0412 04 12 Bias (terminal A1) –100.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
100.0
H3-08 0417 04 17 Multi-function analog 0 to 2 1 2 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
H3-09
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0418
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁ 18
input terminal A2 signal
level selection
Multi-function analog 0 to 1F 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
input terminal A2 function
selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H3-10 0419 04 19 Gain (terminal A2) 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
1000.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H3-11 041A 04 1A Bias (terminal A2) –100.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
100.0
H3-12 041B 04 1B Analog input filter time 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.00 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
constant 2.00
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H3-13 041C 04 1C Terminal A1/A2 switching 0 or 1 1 0 No
5-57
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Parameter
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Instance Attribute
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
operation
H4-01 041D 04 1D Monitor selection 1 to 40 1 2 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(terminal FM)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H4-02 041E 04 1E Gain (terminal FM) 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
1000.0 (0.01) (See (1.00) (See
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(0.00 to note 3.) note 3.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2.5) (See
note 3.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H4-03 041F 04 1F Bias (terminal FM) –110.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
+110.0
(–10.0 to
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
10.0) (See
note 3.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
H4-04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0420
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
20 Monitor selection
(terminal AM)
1 to 40 1 3 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H4-05 0421 04 21 Gain (terminal AM) 0.0 to 0.1% 50.0 (0.50) Yes
1000.0 (0.01) (See (See note
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(0.00 to note 3.) 3.)
2.5) (See
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
note 3.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H4-06 0422 04 22 Bias (terminal AM) –110.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
+110.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(–10.0 to
10.0) (See
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
note 3.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H4-07 0423 04 23 Analog output 1 signal 0 to 2 (0 or 1 0 No
level selection 1) (See
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
note 3.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H4-08 0424 04 24 Analog output 2 signal 0 to 2 (0 or 1 0 No
level selection 1) (See
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
note 3.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H5-01 0425 04 25 Slave address 0 to 20 1 1F No
(See note
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
H5-02 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0426 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁ
26 Communication speed
selection
2.)
0 to 4 1 3 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
H5-03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0427
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
27 Communication parity
selection
0 to 2 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H5-04 0428 04 28 Stopping method after 0 to 3 1 3 No
communication error
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
H5-05
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0429
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
29 Communication error
detection selection
0 or 1 1 1 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H5-06 042A 04 2A Send wait time 5 to 65 1 ms 5 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H5-07 042B 04 2B RTS control ON/OFF 0 or 1 1 1 No
H6-01 042C 04 2C Pulse train input function 0 to 2 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H6-02 042D 04 2D Pulse train input scaling 1000 to 1 Hz 1440 Yes
32000
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
H6-03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
042E
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2E Pulse train input gain 0.0 to
1000.0
0.1% 100.0 Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H6-04 042F 04 2F Pulse train input bias –100.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
100.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
H6-05
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0430
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
30 Pulse train input filter
time
0.00 to
2.00
0.01 s 0.10 Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H6-06 0431 04 31 Pulse train monitor 1, 2, 5, 20, 1 2 Yes
selection 24, 36
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
H6-07
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0432
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁ 32 Pulse train monitor
scaling
0 to 32000 1 Hz 1440 Yes
Note 1. The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3-wire sequence.
5-58
Note 2. Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to RS-422A/485 communications.
5-59
S Protective Function Parameters

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
No. (Hex)
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
range
Setting
unit
nit
Default
setting
Change
d ring
during
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L1-01 0480 04 80 Motor protection 0 to 3 1 1 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
selection
L1-02
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0481
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
81 Motor protection time
constant
0.1 to 5.0 0.1 min 1.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L1-03 0482 04 82 Alarm operation selection 0 to 3 1 3 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
during motor overheating
L1-04 0483 04 83 Motor overheating 0 to 2 1 1 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L1-05 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0484 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁ
84
operation selection
Motor temperature input 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.20 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
filter time constant 10.00
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L2-01 0485 04 85 Momentary power loss 0 to 2 1 0 No
detection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L2-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0486
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
86 Momentary power loss
ridethru time
0 to 2.0 0.1 s Depends
on
capacity.
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L2-03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0487
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
87 Min. baseblock time 0.1 to 5.0 0.1 s Depends
on
capacity.
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L2-04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0488
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
88 Voltage recovery time 0.0 to 5.0 0.1 s Depends
on
capacity.
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L2-05
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0489
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
89 Undervoltage detection
level
150 to 210
(150 to
420) (See
1V 190 (380)
(See note
1.)
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
note 1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L2-06 048A 04 8A KEB deceleration time 0.0 to 0.1 s 0.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
200.0
L2-07 048B 04 8B Momentary recovery time 0.0 to 25.5 0.1 s 0.0 (See No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
note 2.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L2-08 048C 04 8C Frequency reduction gain 0 to 300 1 100 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
at KEB start
L3-01 048F 04 8F Stall prevention selection 0 to 2 1 1 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L3-02 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0490 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁ
90
during accel
Stall prevention level 0 to 200 1% 120 (See No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
during accel note 3.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L3-03 0491 04 91 Stall prevention limit 0 to 100 1% 50 No
during accel
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L3-04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0492
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
92 Stall prevention selection
during decel
0 to 3 1 1 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L3-05 0493 04 93 Stall prevention selection 0 to 2 1 1 No
during running
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L3-06
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0494
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
94 Stall prevention level
during running
30 to 200 1% 120 (See
note 3.)
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L4-01 0499 04 99 Speed agreement 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
detection level 400.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L4-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
049A
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
9A Speed agreement
detection width
0.0 to 20.0 0.1 Hz 2.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L4-03 049B 04 9B Speed agreement –400.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
detection level (+/–) 400.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L4-04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
049C
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
9C Speed agreement
detection width (+/–)
0.0 to 20.0 0.1 Hz 2.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L4-05 049D 04 9D Operation when 0 or 1 1 0 No
frequency reference is
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
lost
5-60
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Parameter
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Instance Attribute
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
operation
L4-06 04C2 04 C2 Frequency reference for 0.0 to 0.1% 80.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
loss of frequency 100.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
reference
L5-01 049E 04 9E Number of auto restart 0 to 10 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
attempts
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L5-02 049F 04 9F Auto restart operation 0 or 1 1 0 No
selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L6-01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04A1
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
A1 Torque detection
selection 1
0 to 8 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L6-02 04A2 04 A2 Torque detection level 1 0 to 300 1% 150 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L6-03 04A3 04 A3 Torque detection time 1 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 s 0.1 No
L6-04 04A4 04 A4 Torque detection 0 to 8 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
selection 2
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L6-05 04A5 04 A5 Torque detection level 2 0 to 300 1% 150 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L6-06 04A6 04 A6 Torque detection time 2 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 s 0.1 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L7-01 04A7 04 A7 Forward drive torque limit 0 to 300 1% 200 No
L7-02 04A8 04 A8 Reverse drive torque 0 to 300 1% 200 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
limit
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L7-03 04A9 04 A9 Forward regenerative 0 to 300 1% 200 No
torque limit
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L7-04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04AA
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
AA Reverse regenerative
torque limit
0 to 300 1% 200 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L8-01 04AD 04 AD Protect selection for 0 or 1 1 0 No
internal DB resistor
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L8-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04AE
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
AE Overheat pre-alarm level 50 to 130 1°C Depends
on
capacity.
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L8-03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04AF
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
AF Operation selection after
overheat pre-alarm
0 to 3 1 3 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L8-05 04B1 04 B1 Input open-phase 0 or 1 1 1 (0) (See No
protection selection note 4.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L8-07
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04B3
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
B3 Output open-phase
protection selection
0 or 1 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L8-09 04B5 04 B5 Ground protection 0 or 1 1 1 No
selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L8-10 04B6 04 B6 Cooling fan control 0 or 1 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
selection
L8-11 04B7 04 B7 Cooling fan control delay 0 to 300 1s 60 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L8-12 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
04B8 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁ
B8
time
Ambient temperature 45 to 60 1°C 45 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L8-15 04BB 04 BB OL2 characteristics 0 or 1 1 1 No
selection at low speeds
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L8-18
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
04BE
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁ BE Soft CLA selection 0 or 1 1 1 No
Note 2. If the setting is 0, the axis will accelerate to the specified speed over the specified acceleration
time (C1-01 to C1-08).
Note 3. The initial value when C6-01 is set to 1 is given. If C6-01 is set to 0, the initial value will be
150%.
5-61

S Special Adjustment Parameters
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Parameter Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting Default Change
No. (Hex)
No range unit
nit setting d ring
during

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
N1-01 0580 05 80 Hunting-prevention func- 0 or 1 1 1 No
tion selection
ÁÁÁÁ
N1-02
ÁÁÁÁ
N2-01
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0581
ÁÁÁÁ
0584
ÁÁÁÁ
05
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
05
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
81
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
84
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Hunting-prevention gain
Speed feedback detec-

0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
0.01
0.01
1.00
1.00
No
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
N2-02ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0585 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
05 ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
85 ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
tion control (AFR) gain
Speed feedback detec-
10.00
0 to 2000 1 ms 50 No

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
tion control (AFR) time
constant

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
N2-03 0586 05 86 Speed feedback detec- 0 to 2000 1 ms 750 No

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
tion control (AFR) time
constant 2

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
N3-01 0588 05 88 High-slip braking decel- 1 to 20 1% 5 No

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
eration frequency width
N3-02 0589 05 89 High-slip braking current 100 to 200 1% 150 No

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
limit

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
N3-03 058A 05 8A High-slip braking stop 0.1 to 10.0 0.1 s 1.0 No
dwell time
ÁÁÁÁ
N3-04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
058B
05
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
8B
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ High-slip braking OL time 30 to 1200 1s 40 No
S Operator Parameters
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Parameter
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
No. (Hex)
No ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
range
Setting
unit
nit
Default
setting
Change
d ring
during
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o1-01 0500 05 00 Monitor selection 4 to 40 1 6 Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o1-02 0501 05 01 Monitor selection after 1 to 4 1 1 Yes
power up
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o1-03 0502 05 02 Frequency units of 0 to 39999 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
reference setting and
monitor
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o1-05 0504 05 04 LCD brightness 0 to 5 1 3 Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o2-01 0505 05 05 LOCAL/REMOTE key 0 or 1 1 1 No
enable/disable
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
o2-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0506
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
05
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
06 STOP key during control
circuit terminal operation
0 or 1 1 1 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o2-03 0507 05 07 Parameter initial value 0 to 2 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o2-04 0508 05 08 kVA selection 0 to FF 1 Depends No
on
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
capacity.
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o2-05 0509 05 09 Frequency reference 0 or 1 1 0 No
setting method selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
o2-06
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
050A
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
05
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
0A Operation selection when
digital operator is
disconnected
0 or 1 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
o2-07
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
050B
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
05
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
0B Cumulative operation
time setting
0 to 65535 1 hr 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o2-08 050C 05 0C Cumulative operation 0 or 1 1 1 (0) (See No
time selection note.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o2-09 050D 05 0D Initialize mode --- --- --- No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o2-10 050E 05 0E Fan operation time 0 to 65535 1 hr 0 No
setting
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
o2-11
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0510
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
05
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
10 Fault trace/fault history
initialization
0 or 1 1 0 No
5-62
Note Values in parentheses are for Asian model Inverters.
S Motor Autotuning Parameters

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
No. (Hex)
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
range
Setting
unit
nit
Default
setting
Change
d ring
during
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
T1-00 0700 07 00 Motor 1/2 selection 1 or 2 1 1 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
T1-01 0701 07 01 Autotuning mode 0 to 2 (See 1 0 No
selection note 2.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
T1-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0702
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
07
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
02 Motor output power 0.00 to
650.00
0.01 kW 0.40 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
T1-03 0703 07 03 Motor rated voltage 0 to 255.0 0.1 V 200.0 No
(0.0 to (400.0)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
510.0) (See note
(See note 1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
T1-04 0704 07 04 Motor rated current 0.32 to 0.01 A Depends No
6.40 (See on
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
note 3.) capacity.
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
T1-05 0705 07 05 Motor base frequency 0 to 400.0 0.01 Hz 60.0 No
(See note
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
4.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
T1-06 0706 07 06 Number of motor poles 2 to 48 1 pole 4 No
T1-07 0707 07 07 Motor base speed 0 to 24000 1 r/min 1750 No

Note 2. Set T1-02 and T1-04 when T1-01 is set to 2. This setting (2) is only possible for V/f control or
V/f control with PG.
Note 3. The setting range is from 10% to 200% of the Inverter rated output current. (The value for a
200-V-class 0.4-kW Inverter is given.)
Note 4. The upper setting limit will be 150.0 Hz when C6-01 is set to 0.
5-63
5-7 3G3PV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and

Attributes
5-7-1 Inputting Control/Frequency (Read/Write)

(Hex)
0000 Reserved
0001 Frequency reference
Bit 0 Run/stop command 1: Run 0: Stop
Bit 1 Reverse/stop command 1: Reverse 0: Stop
Bit 7 Not used.
Bit 8 External error 1: Error (EFO)
Bit 9 Error reset 1: Reset command
0002 Frequency reference (Set units using parameter o1-03.)
0006 PID target value
0007 Analog output 1 setting (–11 V/–726 Dec. to 11 V/726 Dec.)
0008 Not used.
0009 Multi-function contact output setting
Bit 6 Set error contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7. 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7 Error contact (terminal MA-MC) 1: ON 0: OFF
000A to 000E Not used.
000F Reference selection settings
Bit 0 Not used.
Bit 1 PID target value (register 0006H) 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Note Set all unused bits to 0.
5-64
5-7-2 Inverter Monitoring Functions (Read)

(Hex)
0020 Inverter status
Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1 Reverse operation 1: Reverse operation 0: Forward operation or stopped
Bit 2 Inverter startup complete 1: Completed 2: Not completed
Bit 3 Error 1: Error
Bit 4 Data setting error 1: Error
Bit 5 Multi-function contact output (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6 Multi-function contact output (terminal M3-M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
0021 Error details
Bit 0 Overcurrent (OC), ground fault (GF)
Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Bit 2 Inverter overload (OL2)
Bit 3 Inverter overheat (OH1)
Bit 4 Not used.
Bit 5 Fuse blown (PUF)
Bit 6 PID feedback reference lost (FbL)
Bit 7 External error (EF, EFO)
Bit 8 Hardware error (CPF)
Bit 9 Motor overload (OL1) or overtorque 1 (OL3) detected
Bit 10 Not used.
Bit 11 Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Bit 12 Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply error (UV2), inrush
prevention circuit error (UV3)
Bit 13 Not used.
Bit 14 RS-422A/485 communications error (CE)
Bit 15 Operator disconnected (OPR)
0022 Data link status
Bit 0 Writing data
Bits 1 and 2 Not used.
Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors
Bit 4 Data integrity error
0023 Frequency Monitors U1-01 (Unit set with o1-03.)
reference
0024 Output fre- Monitors U1-02 (Unit set with o1-03.)
quency
0025 Output volt- Monitors U1-06 (0.1-V units)
age reference
0026 Output current Monitors U1-03 (Inverters of 7.5 kW or less: 0.01-A units, Inverters of 11
kW or more: 0.1-A units)
0027 Output power Monitors U1-08 (0.1-kW units)
0028 to 002A Not used.
5-65

(Hex)
002B Sequence input status
Bits 7 to F Not used.
002C Inverter status
Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating
Bit 1 Zero speed 1: Zero speed
Bit 2 Frequency matching 1: Matched
Bit 3 User-defined speed matching 1: Matched
Bit 4 Frequency detection 1 1: Output frequency ≤ L4-01
Bit 5 Frequency detection 2 1: Output frequency ≥ L4-01
Bit 6 Inverter startup completed 1: Startup completed
Bit 7 Low voltage detection 1: Detected
Bit 8 Baseblock 1: Inverter output baseblock
Bit 9 Frequency reference mode 1: Not communications 0: Communications
Bit A Run command mode 1: Not communications 0: Communications
Bit B Overtorque detection 1: Detected
Bit C Frequency reference lost 1: Lost
Bit D Retrying error 1: Retrying
Bit E fault (including RS-422A/485 communications time-out) 1: fault occurred
Bit F Communications time-out 1: Timed out
002D Multi-function output status
Bit 0 Multi-function output (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 Multi-function output (terminal M3-M4): 1: ON 0: OFF
002E to 0030 Not used.
0031 Main circuit Monitors U1-07 (1-V units)
DC voltage
0038 PID feedback 1% = 10; 100% = Input corresponding to max. output frequency; without
quantity sign
0039 PID input 1% = 10; 100% = Max. output frequency; without sign
quantity
003A PID output 1% = 10; 100% = Max. output frequency; without sign
quantity
003B CPU software number
003C Flash software number
5-66

(Hex)
003D Communications error details
Bit 0 CRC error
Bit 2 Not used.
Bit 3 Parity error
Bit 4 Overrun error
Bit 5 Framing error
Bit 6 Time-out
003E kVA setting
003F Control method
0040 Frequency reference Monitors U1-01; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03; with sign)
0041 Output frequency Monitors U1-02; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03; with sign)
0042 Output current Monitors U1-03; Inverters of 7.5 kW or less: 0.01-A units,
0043 and Not used.
0044
0045 Output voltage Monitors U1-06; 0.1-V units
0046 Main circuit DC voltage Monitors U1-07; 1-V units
0047 Output power Monitors U1-08; 0.1-kW units (with sign)
0048 Not used.
0049 Input terminal status Monitors U1-10; 1: ON. Bits 0 to 6 correspond to terminals S1 to
S7.
004A Output terminal status Monitors U1-11
Bit 7 Terminals MA and MC; 1: ON
004B Operating
g status Monitors U1-12
Bit 0 During RUN
Bit 1 Zero speed
Bit 2 Forward/reverse (1: Reverse operation)
Bit 3 During fault reset input
Bit 4 Frequency agree
Bit 5 Operation ready
Bit 6 Alarm (minor fault)
Bit 7 Fault
004C Cumulative operation Monitors U1-13; 1-hr units
time
004D FLASH ID software No. Monitors U1-14
004E Frequency reference Monitors U1-15; 0.1% units (100% = 10 V; with sign for ± voltage
(voltage): Terminal A1 setting)
input value
5-67

(Hex)
004F Multi-function analog Monitors U1-16; 0.1% units (100%=20 mA or 100% = 10 V; with
input: Terminal A2 input sign for ± voltage setting)
value
0051 and Not used.
0052
0053 Output frequency after a Monitors U1-20; 0.01-Hz units (with sign)
soft start
0054 and Not used.
0055
0057 PID feedback Monitors U1-24; 0.01% units (input corresponding to max.
frequency = 100%; with sign)
0059 and Not used.
005A
005B CPU ID Monitors U1-28
005F and Not used.
0060
0061 OPE error parameter Monitors U1-34; outputs parameter
0063 PID input quantity Monitors U1-36; 0.01% units (max. frequency = 100%; with sign)
0064 PID output quantity Monitors U1-37; 0.01% units (max. frequency = 100%; with sign)
0065 PID reference Monitors U1-38; 0.01% units (max. frequency = 100%)
0066 RS-422A/485 Monitors U1-39
i i
communications error Bit 0 CRC error
Bit 2 Not used.
Bit 3 Parity error
Bit 4 Overrun error
Bit 5 Framing error
Bit 6 Time-out
0068 Fan operating time Monitors U1-40; 1-hr units
0080 Current fault Monitors U2-01
Code Error Code Error Code Error
display display display
01 PUF 0E --- 1C ---
02 UV1 0F --- 1D OH3
03 UV2 10 --- 1E OPR
04 UV3 11 EF3 1F ERR
06 GF 12 EF4 20 OH4
07 OC 13 EF5 22 BUS
08 OV 14 EF6 25 CF
09 OH 15 EF7 27 EF0
0A OH1 18 --- 28 FBL
0B OL1 19 --- 29 UL3
0C OL2 1A --- 2A ---
0D OL3 1B --- 2B OL7
0081 Last fault Monitors U2-02 (same codes as U2-01)
5-68

(Hex)
0082 Fault frequency Monitors U2-03; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03; with sign)
reference
0083 Fault output reference Monitors U2-04; 0.01-Hz units (units set in o1-03; with sign)
0084 Fault output current Monitors U2-05; Inverters of 7.5 kW or less: 0.01-A units,
0085 Not used.
0086 Fault output voltage Monitors U2-07; 0.1-V units
reference
0087 Fault main circuit DC Monitors U2-08; 1-V units
voltage
0088 Fault output power Monitors U2-09; 0.1-kW units (with sign)
0089 Not used.
008A Fault input terminal Monitors U2-11 (same contents as U1-10)
status
008B Fault output terminal Monitors U2-12 (same contents as U1-11)
status
008C Fault operating status Monitors U2-13 (same contents as U1-12)
008D Fault cumulative Monitors U2-14; 1-hr units
operation time
0090 (0800) Content of last fault Monitors U3-01 (same codes as U2-01)
0091 (0801) Content of 2nd prior fault Monitors U3-02 (same codes as U2-01)
0092 (0802) Content of 3rd prior fault Monitors U3-03 (same codes as U2-01)
0093 (0803) Content of 4th prior fault Monitors U3-04 (same codes as U2-01)
0094 (080A) Cumulative operation Monitors U3-05; 1-hr units
time since last fault
0095 (080B) Cumulative operation Monitors U3-06; 1-hr units
time since 2nd prior fault
0096 (080C) Cumulative operation Monitors U3-07; 1-hr units
time since 3rd prior fault
0097 (080D) Cumulative operation Monitors U3-08; 1-hr units
time since 4th prior fault
0809 Content of 10th prior Monitors U3-14 (same codes as U2-01) (See note.)
fault
080E Cumulative operation Monitors U3-15; 1-hr units (See note.)
080F Cumulative operation Monitors U3-16; 1-hr units (See note.)
0810 Cumulative operation Monitors U3-17; 1-hr units (See note.)
5-69

(Hex)
time since 10th prior
fault

The following tables show the SYSDRIVE 3G3PV Inverter parameter and the corresponding register
vert it.

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
No. (Hex)
No
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
range
Setting
unit
nit
Default
setting
Changes
d ring
during

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
A1-01 0101 01 01 Parameter access level 0 to 2 1 2 Yes

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
A1-03 0103 01 03 Initialize 0 to 3,330 1 0 No

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
A1-04 0104 01 04 Password 0 to 9,999 1 0 No
A1-05 0105 01 05 Password setting 0 to 9,999 1 0 No

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
Parameter

Register
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
No. (Hex)
No
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Instance ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
Class 64 (Hex)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Attribute
Name Setting
range
Setting
unit
nit
Default
setting
Change
d ring
during
operation
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
b1-01
ÁÁÁÁ
b1-02 ÁÁÁÁ
0180
ÁÁÁÁ
0181 ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
01 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
80
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
81 ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Reference selection
Operation method selec-
0 to 3
0 to 3
1
1
1
1
No
No

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
tion
b1-03 0182 01 82 Stopping method selec- 0 to 3 1 0 No

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
tion

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b1-07 0186 01 86 Operation selection after 0 or 1 1 0 No
switching to remote

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
mode

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b1-08 0187 01 87 Run command selection 0 or 1 1 0 No
in programming modes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
b2-01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0189
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
89
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Zero speed level (DC in-
jection braking starting
frequency)
0.0 to 10.0 0.1 Hz 0.5 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
b2-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
018A
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
8A
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
DC injection braking cur-
rent
0 to 100 1% 50 No

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b2-03 018B 01 93 DC injection braking time 0.00 to 0.01 s 0.00 No
at start 10.00
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
b2-04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
018C
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
8C
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
DC Injection braking time
at stop
0.00 to
10.00
0.01 s 0.50 No

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b3-01 0191 01 91 Speed search selection 2 or 3 1 2 No
(current detection or

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
speed calculation)
5-70
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Parameter
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Instance Attribute
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
operation
b3-02 0192 01 92 Speed search operating 0 to 200 1% 120 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
current (current detec-
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
tion)
b3-03 0193 01 93 Speed search decelera- 0.1 to 10.0 0.1 s 2.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
tion time (current detec-
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
tion)
b3-05 0195 01 95 Speed search wait time 0.0 to 20.0 0.1 s 0.2 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(current detection or
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
speed calculation)
b5-01 01A5 01 A5 PID control mode selec- 0 or 1 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
tion
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b5-02 01A6 01 A6 Proportional gain (P) 0.00 to 0.01 1.00 Yes
25.00
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
b5-03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01A7
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
A7 Integral (I) time 0.0 to
360.0
0.1 s 1.0 Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b5-04 01A8 01 A8 Integral (I) limit 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes
100.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
b5-06
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01AA
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
AA PID limit 0.0 to
100.0
0.1% 100.0 Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b5-07 01AB 01 AB PID offset adjustment –100.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
100.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
b5-08
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01AC
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
AC PID primary delay time
constant
0.00 to
10.00
0.01 s 0.00 Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b5-12 01B0 01 B0 Selection of PID feed- 0 to 2 1 0 No
back command loss
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
detection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b5-13 01B1 01 B1 PID feedback command 0 to 100 1% 0 No
loss detection level
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
b5-14
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
01B2
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁÁ B2 PID feedback command 0.0 to 25.5 0.1 s 1.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
loss detection time
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b5-15 01B3 01 B3 PID sleep function opera- 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
tion level 400.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b5-16 01B4 01 B4 PID sleep operation 0.0 to 25.5 0.1 s 0.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
delay time
b5-17 01B5 01 B5 Accel/decel time for PID 0.0 to 25.5 0.1 s 0.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
reference
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b8-01 01CC 01 CC Energy-saving mode 0 or 1 1 0 No
selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
b8-04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01CF
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
CF Energy-saving coefficient 0.00 to
655.00
0.01 Depends
on
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(See note.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
capacity.
b8-05
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
01D0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
D0 Power detection filter
time constant
0 to 2,000 1 ms 20 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
b8-06 01D1 01 D1 Search operation voltage 0 to 100 1% 0 No
limiter
Note The same capacity as the Inverter can be set by initializing this parameter.
5-71
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
Parameter
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
S Tuning Parameters
Register
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
No. (Hex)
No
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Instance
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Attribute
range
0.0
0 to 0.1 s
unit
nit setting
10.0
d ring
during
operation
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C1-01 0200 02 00 Acceleration time 1 0 o 0 00 Yes
C1-02 0201 02 01 Deceleration time 1 600 0
600.0 Yes
ÁÁÁÁ
C1-03
ÁÁÁÁ
C1-04ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0202
ÁÁÁÁ
0203 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
02
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
02 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
02
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
03
Acceleration time 2
Deceleration time 2
Yes
Yes

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C1-09 0208 02 08 Deceleration Stop Time No

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
C1-11 020A 02 0A Accel/decel time 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
switching frequency 400.0
ÁÁÁÁ
C2-01
ÁÁÁÁ
C2-02
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
020B
ÁÁÁÁ
020C
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
02
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
02
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
0B
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
0C
S-curve characteristic
time at acceleration start
S-curve characteristic
0.00 to
2.50
0.00 to
0.01 s
0.01 s
0.20
0.20
No
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
C4-01ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0215 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
02 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
15
time at acceleration end
Torque compensation
2.50
0.00 to 0.01 1.00 Yes

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
gain 2.50
C4-02 0216 02 16 Torque compensation 0 to 10,000 1 ms 200 (See No

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
primary delay time note 1.)

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
constant
C6-02 0224 02 24 Carrier frequency 1 to F 1 Depends No

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
selection on

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
capacity.
C6-03 0225 02 25 Carrier frequency upper 2.0 to 15.0 0.1 kHz Depends No

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
limit (See notes on

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2 and 3.) capacity.
C6-04 0226 02 26 Carrier frequency lower 0.4 to 15.0 0.1 kHz Depends No

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
limit (See notes on

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
2 and 3.) capacity.
C6-05 0227 02 27 Carrier frequency 00 to 99 1 00 No

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ proportional gain (See note
3.)
Note 2. The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter.
Note 3. These parameters can be monitored or set only when F is set for C6-02.
5-72
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
Parameter
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
No. (Hex)
No
ÁÁÁÁ Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Instance
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Attribute
range
0 to
o max.
unit
0.01
nit
0 Hz
setting d ring
during
operation

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
d1-01 0280 02 80 Frequency reference 1 a 0 0.00 Yes
d1-02 0281 02 81 Frequency reference 2 t t fre-
output f (S t with
(Set ith 0.00 Yes

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
quency o1-03 )
o1-03.)

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
d1-17 0292 02 92 Jog frequency reference 6.00 Yes

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
d2-01 0289 02 89 Frequency reference up- 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 No
per limit 110.0
ÁÁÁÁ
d2-02
ÁÁÁÁ
d2-03
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
028A
ÁÁÁÁ
0293
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
02
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
02
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
8A
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
93
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Frequency reference
lower limit
Master speed reference
0.0 to
110.0
0.0 to
0.1%
0.1%
0.0
0.0
No
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
d3-01ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0294 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁ
02 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
94
ÁÁÁÁÁ
lower limit
Jump frequency 1
110.0
0.0
0 0 to
400 0
o 0.1 Hz 0.0 No

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
d3-02 0295 02 95 Jump frequency 2 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 No

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
d3-04 0297 02 97 Jump frequency width 0.0 to 20.0 0.1 Hz 1.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
d6-01
ÁÁÁÁ
d6-02ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
02A0
ÁÁÁÁ
02A1 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
02
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
02 ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
A0
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
A1
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Field weakening level
Field frequency
0 to 100
0.0 to
400.0
1%
0.1 Hz
80
0.0
No
No
5-73

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Parameter
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
No. (Hex)
No ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
range
Setting
unit
nit
Default
setting
Change
d ring
during
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E1-01 0300 03 00 Input voltage setting 155 to 255 1V 200 (400) No
(155 to (See note
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
510) (See 1.)
note 1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E1-03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0302
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
02 V/f pattern selection 0 to F
E cannot
be set.
1 F No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E1-04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0303
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
03 Max. output frequency 0.0 to
120.0
0.1 Hz 50.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E1-05 0304 03 04 Max. voltage 0.0 to 0.1 V 200.0 No
255.0 (0.0 (400.0)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
to 510.0) (See note
(See note 1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E1-06 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0305 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁÁ
05 Base frequency
1.)
0.0 to
120.0
0.1 Hz 50.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E1-07
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0306
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
06 Mid. output frequency 0.0 to
120.0
0.1 Hz 3.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E1-08 0307 03 07 Mid. output frequency 0.0 to 255 0.1 V 15.0 (30.0) No
voltage (0.0 to (See note
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
510.0) 1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(See note
1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E1-09 0308 03 08 Min. output frequency 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 1.5 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
120.0
E1-10 0309 03 09 Min. output frequency 0.0 to 0.1 V 9.0 (18.0) No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
voltage 255.0 (0.0 (See note
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
to 510.0) 1.)
(See note
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E1-11 030A 03 0A Mid. output frequency 2 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 (See No
120.0 note 2.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
E1-12 030B 03 0B Mid. output frequency 0.0 to 0.1 V 0.0 (See No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
voltage 2 255.0 (0.0 note 2.)
to 510.0)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(See note
1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E1-13
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
030C
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
0C Base voltage 0.0 to
255.0 (0.0
to 510.0)
0.1 V 0.0 (See
note 3.)
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(See note
1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E2-01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
030E
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
0E Motor rated current 0.32 to
6.40 (See
note 4.)
0.01 A Depends
on
capacity.
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
E2-05
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0312
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
12 Motor line-to-line
resistance
0.000 to
65.000
0.001 Ω Depends
on
capacity.
No
Note 2. The settings of E1-11 and E1-12 are ignored if set to 0.0.
Note 3. E1-13 will be the same value as E1-05 after autotuning.
5-74
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
S Option Parameters
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Class 64 (Hex)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Parameter Register Name Setting Setting Default Change
No. (Hex)
No range unit
nit setting d ring
during

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F6-01 03A2 03 A2 DeviceNet fault operation 0 to 3 1 1 No
selection

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F6-02 03A3 03 A3 Communications external 0 or 1 1 0 No

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
fault input detection
method selection

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F6-03 03A4 03 A4 Communications external 0 to 3 1 1 No

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
fault input operation
selection

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
F6-05 03A6 03 A6 Display unit selection for 0 or 1 1 0 No
current monitor
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
Parameter Register
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Instance
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Attribute
ÁÁÁÁÁ Name Setting Setting Default Change

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
operation
H1-01 0400 04 00 Terminal S3 function 0 to 6A 1 24 No

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
selection

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H1-02 0401 04 01 Terminal S4 function 0 to 6A 1 14 No
selection
ÁÁÁÁ
H1-03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0402
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
02
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Terminal S5 function
ÁÁÁÁÁ
selection
0 to 6A 1 3 (0) (See
note1.)
No

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H1-04 0403 04 03 Terminal S6 function 0 to 6A 1 4 (3) (See No
selection note1.)
ÁÁÁÁ
H1-05
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0404
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Terminal S7 function
ÁÁÁÁÁ
selection
0 to 6A 1 6 (4) (See
note1.)
No

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H2-01 040B 04 0B Terminal M1-M2 Select 0 to 38 1 0 No
H2-02 040C 04 0C Terminal M3-M4 select 0 to 38 1 1 No
ÁÁÁÁ
H3-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0411
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
11
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Gain (terminal A1)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
0.0 to
1,000.0
0.1% 100.0 Yes

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H3-03 0412 04 12 Bias (terminal A1) –100.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
100.0
ÁÁÁÁ
H3-08
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0417
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
17
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Multi-function analog
ÁÁÁÁÁ
input terminal A2 signal
level selection
0 or 2 1 2 No
ÁÁÁÁ
H3-09
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0418
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
18
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Multi-function analog
ÁÁÁÁÁ
input terminal A2 function
selection
0 to 1F 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
H3-10
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0419
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
19
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Gain (terminal A2)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
0.0 to
1,000.0
0.1% 100.0 Yes

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H3-11 041A 04 1A Bias (terminal A2) –100.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
100.0
ÁÁÁÁ
H3-13
ÁÁÁÁ
H4-01ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
041C
ÁÁÁÁ
041D ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
04ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
1C
1DÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Terminal A1/A2 switching
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Monitor selection
0 or 1
1 to 40
1
1
0
2
No
No

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(terminal FM)
H4-02 041E 04 1E Gain (terminal FM) 0.0 to 0.1% 100.0 Yes

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
1,000.0

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H4-03 041F 04 1F Bias (terminal FM) –110.0 to 0.1% 0.0 Yes
110.0
ÁÁÁÁ
H4-04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0420
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
20
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Monitor selection
ÁÁÁÁÁ
(terminal AM)
1 to 40 1 3 No

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H4-05 0421 04 21 Gain (terminal AM) 0.0 to 0.1% 50.0 Yes
1,000.0
ÁÁÁÁ
H4-06
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0422
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
22
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Bias (terminal AM)
ÁÁÁÁÁ
–110.0 to
110.0
0.1% 0.0 Yes
5-75
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Parameter
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Instance Attribute Name Setting Setting Default Change
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
operation
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
H4-07
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0423
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
23 Analog output 1 signal
level selection
0 or 2 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H4-08 0424 04 24 Analog output 2 signal 0 or 2 1 0 No
level selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
H5-01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0425
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
25 Slave address 0 to 20
(See note
2.)
1 1F No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
H5-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0426
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
26 Communication speed
selection
0 to 4 1 3 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H5-03 0427 04 27 Communication parity 0 to 2 1 0 No
selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
H5-04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0428
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
28 Stopping method after
communication error
0 to 3 1 3 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H5-05 0429 04 29 Communication error 0 or 1 1 1 No
detection selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
H5-06
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
042A
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁ 2A Send wait time 5 to 65 1 ms 5 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
H5-07 042B 04 2B RTS control ON/OFF 0 or 1 1 1 No
Note 2. Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to RS-422A/485 communications.
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
Parameter
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
Class 64 (Hex)
ÁÁÁÁÁ Name Setting Setting Default Change

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
No. (Hex)
No range unit
nit setting d ring
during
Instance Attribute

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
operation
L1-01 0480 04 80 Motor protection 0 or 1 1 1 No

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
selection

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L1-02 0481 04 81 Motor protection time 0.1 to 5.0 0.1 min 1.0 No
constant
ÁÁÁÁ
L1-03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0482
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ
82
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Alarm operation selection
during motor overheating
0 to 3 1 3 No

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L1-04 0483 04 83 Motor overheating 0 to 2 1 1 No
operation selection
ÁÁÁÁ
L1-05
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0484
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ
84
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Motor temperature input
filter time constant
0.00 to
10.00
0.01 s 0.20 No

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L2-01 0485 04 85 Momentary power loss 0 to 2 1 0 No
detection
ÁÁÁÁ
L2-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0486
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ
86
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Momentary power loss
ridethru time
0 to 2.0 0.1 s Depends
on
capacity.
No
ÁÁÁÁ
L2-03
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0487
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ
87
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Min. baseblock time 0.1 to 5.0 0.1 s Depends
on
capacity.
No
ÁÁÁÁ
L2-04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0488
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ
88
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Voltage recovery time 0.0 to 5.0 0.1 s Depends
on
capacity.
No
ÁÁÁÁ
L2-05
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0489
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ
89
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Undervoltage detection
level
150 to 210
(150 to
420) (See
1V 190 (380)
(See note.)
No

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
note.)

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L3-01 048F 04 8F Stall prevention selection 0 to 2 1 1 No
during accel
ÁÁÁÁ
L3-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0490
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ
90
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Stall prevention level
during accel
0 to 200 1% 120 No
5-76
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Parameter
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Instance Attribute
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
operation
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
during decel
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
during running
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L3-06
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0494
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
94 Stall prevention level
during running
30 to 200 1% 120 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L4-01 0499 04 99 Speed agreement 0.0 to 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
detection level 400.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L4-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
049A
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
9A Speed agreement
detection width
0.0 to 20.0 0.1 Hz 2.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L4-05 049D 04 9D Operation when 0 or 1 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
lost
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L4-06 04C2 04 C2 Frequency reference for 0.0 to 0.1% 80.0 No
loss of frequency 100.0
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
reference
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L5-01 049E 04 9E Number of auto restart 0 to 10 1 0 No
attempts
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L5-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
049F
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
9F Auto restart operation
selection
0 or 1 1 0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L6-01 04A1 04 A1 Torque detection 0 to 8 1 0 No
selection 1
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L6-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L6-03 ÁÁÁÁ
04A2
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
04A3 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁ
A2
A3
Torque detection level 1
Torque detection time 1
0 to 300
0.0 to 10.0
1%
0.1 s
150
0.1
No
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L8-02 04AE 04 AE Overheat pre-alarm level 50 to 130 1°C Depends No
on
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
capacity.
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L8-03 04AF 04 AF Operation selection after 0 to 3 1 3 No
overheat pre-alarm
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L8-09
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
04B5
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁ B5 Ground protection 0 or 1 1 1 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
selection
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
L8-11 04B7 04 B7 Cooling fan control delay 0 to 300 1s 60 No
time
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L8-12
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
L8-15 ÁÁÁÁ
04B8
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
04BB ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
04
ÁÁÁÁÁ
B8
BB
Ambient temperature
OL2 characteristics
selection at low speeds
45 to 60
0 or 1
1°C
1
45
1
No
No
Note Values in parentheses are for 400-V-class Inverters.
S Special Adjustment Parameters

ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Parameter ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
No. (Hex)
No range unit
nit setting d ring
during
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
N1-01
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
N1-02
ÁÁÁÁ
0580
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0581
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
05
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
05
ÁÁÁÁÁ
80
81
Hunting-prevention func-
tion selection
Hunting-prevention gain
0 or 1
0.00 to
1
0.01
1
1.00
No
No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
N3-01 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
0588 ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
05
ÁÁÁÁÁ
88 High-slip braking
2.50
1 to 20 1% 5 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
deceleration frequency
width
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
N3-02 0589 05 89 High-slip braking current 100 to 200 1% 150 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
limit
N3-03 058A 05 8A High-slip braking stop 0.1 to 10.0 0.1 s 1.0 No
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
dwell time
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
N3-04 058B 05 8B High-slip braking OL time 30 to 1200 1s 40 No
5-77
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
Parameter
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Register
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
No. (Hex)
No
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Instance
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Attribute
range unit
nit setting d ring
during
operation

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o1-01 0500 05 00 Monitor selection 4 to 40 1 6 Yes
o1-02 0501 05 01 Monitor selection after 1 to 4 1 1 Yes

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
power up

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o1-03 0502 05 02 Frequency units of 0 to 39,999 1 0 No
reference setting and

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
monitor

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o1-05 0504 05 04 LCD brightness 0 to 5 1 3 Yes

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o2-01 0505 05 05 LOCAL/REMOTE key 0 or 1 1 1 No
enable/disable
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
o2-02
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
0506
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
05
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
06
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
STOP key during control
circuit terminal operation
0 or 1 1 1 No

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o2-03 0507 05 07 Parameter initial value 0 to 2 1 0 No
o2-04 0508 05 08 kVA selection 0 to FF 1 Depends No

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
on

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
capacity.
o2-05 0509 05 09 Frequency reference 0 or 1 1 0 No

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
setting method selection

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o2-06 050A 05 0A Operation selection when 0 or 1 1 0 No
digital operator is

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
disconnected

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o2-07 050B 05 0B Cumulative operation 0 to 65,535 1 hr 0 No
time setting
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
o2-08
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
050C
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
05
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
0C
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
Cumulative operation
time selection
0 or 1 1 1 No

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o2-09 050D 05 0D Initialize mode --- --- --- No

ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁ
o2-10 050E 05 0E Fan operation time 0 to 65,535 1 hr 0 No
setting
ÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁ
o2-12
ÁÁÁÁ
0510
05
ÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
10
ÁÁÁÁÁ Fault history initialization 0 or 1 1 0 No
5-78
5-8 3G3FV Register Numbers, Classes, Instances, and

Attributes
5-8-1 Inputting Control/Frequency

The Inverter’s various control inputs are allocated to the registers shown in the following table. For ex-
ample, to set the frequency reference and begin operation, first set the reference value to the frequency
reference register “0001,” and then write the run command to the Inverter’s run command register
“0000.”
Note 1. Set values are retained until changed by the next writing operation.
Note 2. The following registers are in RAM, so they are all cleared to zero when the Inverter’s power
supply is turned OFF.
Register No. (Hex) Function Content Read Write
0000 Inverter run command (Refer to table below.) Yes Yes
0001 Frequency reference Sets frequency reference Yes Yes
value. (See note 1.)
0002 Not used. --- --- ---
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007 Multi-function analog +11 V = 02D6 hex Yes Yes
output 1 (See note 2.)
0008 Multi-function analog +11 V = 02D6 hex Yes Yes
output 2 (See note 2.)
0009 Inverter output (See note (Refer to table below.) Yes Yes
3.)
000A Not used. --- --- ---
000B
000C
000D
000E
000F
D Inverter Run Commands: Register Number 0000 Hex

Bit Content
0 Forward/stop (1: Forward operation)
1 Reverse/stop (1: Reverse operation)
2 Multi-function input 1
8 to 15 Not used.
5-79
D Inverter Outputs: Register Number 0009 Hex
Bit Content
0 Multi-function contact output (1: ON)
1 Multi-function output 1 (1: ON)
2 Multi-function output 2 (1: ON)
3 to 15 Not used.
Note 1. The setting unit of the frequency reference can be changed in o1-03 (frequency reference
setting and display units). The default setting is 0.01 Hz.
Note 2. The multi-function analog output 1 and 2 registers can be used to set the Inverter’s analog
outputs by means of communications. To do that, set “31 (1F hex)” for H4-01 (multi-function
analog output terminal 21 monitor selection) and H4-04 (multi-function analog output terminal
23 monitor selection).
Note 3. The Inverter’s multi-function outputs can be turned from ON to OFF by means of communica-
tions. To do that, set “F” for multi-function output parameters H2-01 (multi-function contact
output: terminals 9-10 function selection), H2-01 (multi-function output 1: terminal 25 function
selection), and H2-03 (multi-function output 2: terminal 25 function selection).
5-8-2 Inverter Monitoring Functions

All Inverter monitoring can be accessed. To read Inverter status, fault monitoring, alarm monitoring, I/O
status monitoring, error log, etc., specify the register number from the following table and read the data.
Register number (hex) Function Content Read Write
0010 Inverter status (Refer to table below.) Yes No
0011 Operator status (Refer to table below.) Yes No
0012 Operator setting error OPE error number Yes No
number
0013 Not used. --- --- ---
0014 Fault 1 (Refer to table below.) Yes No
0015 Fault 2 (Refer to table below.) Yes No
0016 Fault 3 Not used. Yes No
0017 CPF error 1 (Refer to table below.) Yes No
0018 CPF error 2 (Refer to table below.) Yes No
0019 Alarm 1 (Refer to table below.) Yes No
001A Alarm 2 (Refer to table below.) Yes No
001B to 001F Not used. --- --- ---
5-80
D Inverter Status: Register Number 0010 Hex
Bit Content
0 During RUN
1 Zero speed
2 Forward/reverse (1: Reverse operation)
3 During Fault Reset input
4 Frequency agree 1
5 Inverter operation ready
6 Alarm
7 Fault
8 to 15 Not used.
D Operator Status: Register Number 0011 Hex

Bit Content
0 1: Operation fault
1 1: EEPROM error
2 1: Program mode
3 00: Operator connecting
g
4 11 Operator
11: O disconnecting
di i
5 to 15 Not used.
D Fault 1: Register Number 0014 Hex

Bit Display Content
0 PUF Fuse open
2 UV2 Undervoltage (CTL)
4 SC Short-circuit
5 GF Ground fault
6 OC Overcurrent
7 OV Overvoltage
8 OH Overheat (See note 1.)
9 OH1 Overheat (See note 2.)
10 OL1 Motor overload
11 OL2 Inverter overload
14 RR Braking transistor
15 RH Braking resistor
Note 1. Maximum (upper limit) temperature was exceeded.

Note 2. Set temperature was exceeded.
5-81
Bit Display Content
0 EF3 External fault (3)
6 --- Not used.
7 OS Overspeed
8 DEV Speed deviation
10 PF Input phase loss
11 LF Output phase loss
12 --- Not used.
13 OPR OPR disconnected
14 ERR EEPROM error
15 --- Not used.

Bit Display Content
0 --- Not used.
1 BUS Communications error
D CPF Error 1: Register Number 0017

Bit Display Content
0 --- Not used.
1 ---
2 CPF02 Baseblock circuit error
3 CPF03 EEPROM error
4 CPF04 Internal A/D error (See note 1.)
5 CPF05 External A/D error (See note 2.)
6 CPF06 Option connect error
7 to 15 --- Not used.
Note 1. CPU internal A/D converter error

Note 2. CPU external A/D converter error
D CPF Error 2: Register Number 0018 Hex

Bit Display Content
0 CPF20 Optional Card A/D error
5-82
D Alarm 1: Register Number 0019 Hex
Bit Display Content
0 UV Undervoltage (main)
1 OV Overvoltage
2 OH Overheat
3 OH2 External overheat 2
6 EF Forward/reverse simultaneous input
7 BB Baseblock
14 --- Not used.
15 OS Overspeed
D Alarm 2: Register Number 001A Hex

Bit Display Content
5-83
S Inverter Monitoring: U1-

Register Monitor Monitored item Output unit Read Write
number number
0020 U1-01 Frequency reference Set in o1-03 Yes No
0021 U1-02 Output frequency Set in o1-03 Yes No
0022 U1-03 Output current 8192 dec = Inverter rated Yes No
current
0023 U1-04 Control method Set in A1-02 Yes No
0024 U1-05 Motor speed Set in o1-03 Yes No
0025 U1-06 Output voltage 0.1 V Yes No
0026 U1-07 Main circuit DC voltage 1V Yes No
0027 U1-08 Output power 0.1 kW Yes No
0028 U1-09 Torque reference 0.1% Yes No
0029 U1-10 Input terminal status Bits 0 to 7 = terminals 1 to 8 Yes No
002A U1-11 Output terminal status (Refer to table below.) Yes No
002B U1-12 Operating status (Refer to table below.) Yes No
002C U1-13 Elapsed time 1 hour Yes No
002D U1-14 FLASH ID software No. --- Yes No
002E U1-15 Terminal 13 level 0.1% (100% = 10 V) Yes No
002F U1-16 Terminal 14 level 0.1% (100% = 20 mA) Yes No
0030 U1-17 Terminal 16 level 0.1% (100% = 10 V) Yes No
0031 U1-18 Motor secondary current 0.1% (100%: Motor rated Yes No
current)
0032 U1-19 Motor excitation current 0.1% (100%: Motor rated Yes No
current)
0033 U1-20 Output frequency after a Set in o1-03 Yes No
soft start
0034 U1-21 Input to speed control loop 0.01% (100%: Maximum Yes No
frequency)
0035 U1-22 Output from speed control 0.1% (100%: Motor rated Yes No
loop current)
0036 U1-23 Speed deviation 0.01% (100%: Maximum Yes No
frequency)
0037 U1-24 PID feedback 0.01% (100%: Maximum Yes No
frequency)
0039 U1-26 Voltage reference for 0.1 V Yes No
secondary current
003A U1-27 Voltage reference for 0.1 V Yes No
excitation current
003B U1-28 CPU ID --- Yes No
5-84
D Output Terminal Status: Register Number 002A Hex
Bit Content
0 1: Terminal 9 and 10 short
3 Not used.
4
5
6
8 to 15 Not used.
D Operating Status: Register Number 002B Hex

Bit Content
0 During RUN
1 Zero speed
2 Forward/reverse (1: Reverse operation)
3 During Fault Reset input
4 Frequency agree 1
5 Operation ready
6 Alarm
7 Fault
8 to 15 Not used.
5-85
S Inverter Monitoring: U2-, U3-

Register Monitor Monitored item Output unit Read Write
number number
0080 U2-01 Current fault (Refer to table below.) Yes No
0081 U2-02 Last fault (Refer to table below.) Yes No
0082 U2-03 Fault frequency reference Set in o1-03. Yes No
0083 U2-04 Fault output reference Set in o1-03. Yes No
0084 U2-05 Fault output current 8192 dec = Inverter rated Yes No
current
0085 U2-06 Fault motor speed Set in o1-03. Yes No
0086 U2-07 Fault output voltage 0.1 V Yes No
reference
0087 U2-08 Fault main circuit DC 1V Yes No
voltage
0088 U2-09 Fault output power 0.1 kW Yes No
0089 U2-10 Fault torque reference 0.1% Yes No
008A U2-11 Fault input terminal status Bits 0 to 7 = terminals 1 to Yes No
8
008B U2-12 Fault output terminal status (Same as for U1-11 on Yes No
previous page.)
008C U2-13 Fault operating status (Same as for U1-12 on Yes No
previous page.)
008D U2-14 Fault elapsed time 1 hour Yes No
0090 U3-01 Content of last fault (Refer to table below.) Yes No
0091 U3-02 Content of 2nd prior fault (Refer to table below.) Yes No
0092 U3-03 Content of 3rd prior fault (Refer to table below.) Yes No
0093 U3-04 Content of 4th prior fault (Refer to table below.) Yes No
0094 U3-05 Elapsed time since last 1 hour Yes No
fault
0095 U3-06 Elapsed time since 2nd 1 hour Yes No
prior fault
0096 U3-07 Elapsed time since 3rd 1 hour Yes No
prior fault
0097 U3-08 Elapsed time since 4th 1 hour Yes No
prior fault
5-86
D Error Codes
Code Display Content
01 PUF Fuse open
03 UV2 Undervoltage (CTL)
05 SC Short-circuit
06 GF Ground fault
07 OC Overcurrent
08 OV Overvoltage
09 OH Overheat (See note 1.)
0A OH1 Overheat (See note 2.)
0B OL1 Motor overload
0C OL2 Inverter overload
0D OL3 Overtorque detection 1
0E OL4 Overtorque detection 2
0F RR Braking transistor
10 RH Braking resistor
17 --- Not used.
18 OS Overspeed
1A PGO PG is disconnected
1B PF Input phase loss
1C LF Output phase loss
1D --- Not used.
1E OPR OPR disconnected
1F ERR EEPROM error
21 to FF --- Not used.
Note 1. Maximum (upper limit) temperature was exceeded.

Note 2. Set temperature was exceeded.
5-87

The following tables show the SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Inverter parameters and the corresponding register
vert it.

Parameter Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting range Setting unit Default Changes
No. (Hex)
No setting d ring
during
A1-00 0100 --- --- Display Language 0 to 6 1 1 Yes
A1-01 0101 01 01 Access Level 0 to 4 1 2 Yes
A1-02 0102 01 02 Select Control 0 to 3 1 2 No
Method
A1-03 0103 --- --- Initialize 0 to 3,330 1 0 No
A1-04 0104 --- --- Password 0 to 9,999 1 0 No
A1-05 0105 --- --- Setting the Password 0 to 9,999 1 0 No
A2-01 to 0106 to --- --- User-parameter 0180 to 050C --- --- No
A2-32 0125 settings
Set the
register
numbers for
b1-01 to
o2-08.
Parameter Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting range Setting Default Changes
No. (Hex)
No unit
nit setting d ring
during
b1-01 0180 01 03 Frequency reference 0 to 3 1 1 No
selection
b1-02 0181 01 04 Run source selection 0 to 3 1 1 No
b1-03 0182 01 05 Stopping method 0 to 3 1 0 No
selection
b1-04 0183 01 06 Disabling reverse 0 or 1 1 0 No
operation
b1-05 0184 01 07 Operation selection 0 to 3 1 0 No
for minimum
frequency (E1-09 or
less)
b1-06 0185 --- --- Setting control input 0 or 1 1 1 No
responsiveness
b1-07 0186 --- --- Operation selection 0 or 1 1 0 No
after switching to
remote mode
b1-08 01A6 --- --- Run source selection 0 or 1 1 0 No
when not in drive
mode
b2-01 0187 01 08 Excitation level (DC 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 Hz 0.5 No
injection starting
frequency)
b2-02 0188 01 09 DC injection braking 0 to 100 1% 50 No
current
5-88
No. (Hex) unit setting during
b2-03 0189 01 0A DC injection braking 0.00 to 10.00 0.01 s 0.00 No
time at start
b2-04 018A 01 0B DC injection braking 0.00 to 10.00 0.01 s 0.50 No
time at stop
b2-08 01AB --- --- Magnetic flux 0 to 500 1% 0 No
compensation amount
b3-01 018E 01 0C Speed search 0 or 1 1 0 (See No
selection at start note.)
b3-02 018F 01 0D Speed search 0 to 200 1% 100 No
operation current
b3-03 0190 01 0E Speed search 0.1 to 10.0 0.1 s 2.0 No
deceleration time
b4-01 0192 --- --- Timer function 0.0 to 300.0 0.1 s 0.0 No
ON-delay time
b4-02 0193 --- --- Timer function 0.0 to 300.0 0.1 s 0.0 No
OFF-delay time
b5-01 0194 01 0F PID control selection 0 to 4 1 0 No
b5-02 0195 01 10 Proportional gain (P) 0.00 to 25.00 0.01 1.00 Yes
b5-03 0196 01 11 Integral time (I) 0.0 to 360.0 0.1 s 1.0 Yes
b5-04 0197 01 12 Integral limit (I) 0.0 to 100.0 0.1% 100.0 Yes
b5-05 0198 01 13 Differential time (D) 0.00 to 10.00 0.01 s 0.00 Yes
b5-06 0199 01 14 PID limit 0.0 to 100.0 0.1% 100.0 Yes
b5-07 019A 01 15 PID offset adjustment –100.0 to 100.0 0.1% 0.0 Yes
b5-08 019B 01 16 PID primary delay 0.00 to 10.00 0.01 s 0.00 Yes
time constant
b5-09 01A7 --- --- PID output 0 or 1 1 0 No
characteristic
selection
b5-10 01A8 --- --- PID output gain 0.0 to 25.0 0.1 1.0 No
b5-11 01A9 --- --- PID output reverse 0 or 1 1 0 No
selection
b5-12 01AF --- --- Feedback loss 0 to 2 1 0 No
detection selection
b5-13 01B0 --- --- Feedback loss 0 to 100 1% 0 No
detection level
b5-14 01B1 --- --- Feedback loss 0.0 to 25.0 0.1 s 1.0 No
detection time
b6-01 019C 01 17 Dwell frequency at 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
start
b6-02 019D 01 18 Dwell time at start 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 s 0.0 No
b6-03 019E 01 19 Dwell frequency at 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
stop
b6-04 019F 01 1A Dwell time at stop 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 s 0.0 No
b7-01 01A0 01 1B Droop control gain 0.0 to 100.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 Yes
b7-02 01A1 01 1C Droop control delay 0.03 to 2.00 0.01 s 0.05 Yes
time
b8-01 01A2 01 1D Energy-saving gain 0 to 100 1% 80 No
b8-02 01A3 01 1E Energy-saving 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
frequency
b9-01 01A4 01 1F Zero-servo gain 0 to 100 1 5 No
b9-02 01A5 01 20 Zero-servo 0 to 16,383 1 pulse 10 No
completion width
Note When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to default settings. (The open loop vec-
tor control default setting is given above.)
5-89
S Tuning Parameters
No. (Hex)
No unit
nit setting during
d ring op-
Instance Attribute eration
C1-01 0200 01 21 Acceleration time 1 0 0 to
0.0 o 6,000
6,000.00 0.1
0 10.0
00 Yes
C1-02 0201 01 22 Deceleration time 1 (S note
(See t 1
1.)) Yes
C1-03 0202 01 23 Acceleration time 2 Yes
C1-09 0208 01 29 Emergency stop time No
C1-10 0209 --- --- Acceleration/ 0 or 1 1 1 No
deceleration time units
C1-11 020A --- --- Acceleration/decelerati 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
on switching frequency
C2-01 020B 01 2A S-curve characteristic 0.00 to 2.50 0.01 s 0.20 No
time at acceleration
start.
C2-02 020C 01 2B S-curve characteristic 0.00 to 2.50 0.01 s 0.20 No
time at acceleration
end.
C2-03 020D 01 2C S-curve characteristic 0.00 to 2.50 0.01 s 0.20 No
time at deceleration
start.
C2-04 020E 01 2D S-curve characteristic 0.00 to 2.50 0.01 s 0.00 No
time at deceleration
end.
C3-01 020F 01 2E Slip compensation 0.0 to 2.5 0.1 1.0 (See Yes
gain. note 2.)
C3-02 0210 01 2F Slip compensation 0 to 10,000 1 ms 200 (See No
primary delay time. note 2.)
C3-03 0211 01 30 Slip compensation 0 to 250 1% 200 No
limit.
C3-04 0212 01 31 Slip compensation 0 or 1 1 0 No
during regeneration.
C3-05 0242 01 32 Flux Calculation 0 or 1 1 0 No
Method
C3-06 0243 --- --- Output voltage limiting 0 or 1 1 0 No
action selection
C4-01 0213 01 33 Torque compensation 0.00 to 2.50 0.01 1.00 Yes
gain.
C4-02 0214 01 34 Torque compensation 0 to 10,000 1 ms 20 (See No
delay time. note 2.)
C4-03 0244 --- --- Startup torque 0.0 to 200.0 0.1% 0.0 No
(forward operation)
C4-04 0245 --- --- Startup torque –200.0 to 0 0.1% 0.0 No
(reverse operation)
C4-05 0246 --- --- Startup torque 0 to 200 1 ms 10 No
compensation time
C5-01 0215 01 35 ASR Proportional (P) 0.00 to 300.00 0.01 20.0 (See Yes
gain 1 note 2.)
C5-02 0216 01 36 ASR Integral (I) time 1 0.000 to 0.001 s 0.500 (See Yes
10.000 note 2.)
C5-03 0217 01 37 ASR Proportional Gain 0.00 to 300.00 0.01 20.0 (See Yes
(P) 2 note 2.)
C5-04 0218 01 38 ASR Integral (I) time 2 0.000 to 0.001 s 0.500 (See Yes
10.000 note 2.)
5-90
No. (Hex) unit setting during op-
C5-05 0219 01 39 ASR Limit 0.0 to 20.0 0.1% 5.0 No
C5-06 021A 01 3A ASR Primary delay 0.000 to 0.500 0.001 s 0.004 No
time
C5-07 021B 01 3B ASR Switching 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
frequency
C5-08 0241 01 3C ASR Integral (I) Limit 0 to 400 1% 400 No
C6-01 021C 01 3D Carrier frequency 2.0 to 15.0 0.1 kHz 15.0 (See No
upper limit. (See note 4.) note 3.)
C6-02 021D 01 3E Carrier frequency 0.4 to 15.0 0.1 kHz 15.0 (See No
lower limit. note 3.)
C6-03 021E 01 3F Carrier frequency 0 to 99 1 0 No
proportional gain.
C7-01 021F 01 40 Hunting prevention 0 or 1 1 1 No
selection
C7-02 0220 01 41 Hunting prevention 0.00 to 2.50 0.01 1.00 No
gain
C8-08 022A 01 42 AFR Gain 0.00 to 10.00 0.01 1.00 No
C8-09 022B --- --- AFR primary delay 0 to 2,000 1 ms 50 No
time
C8-30 0240 --- --- Carrier Frequency 1 or 2 1 2 No
Selection During
Auto-tuning
Note 1. The setting range and setting unit for acceleration/deceleration times will differ according to
the setting for C1-10 (the unit for acceleration/deceleration time). If C1-10 is set to 0, the set-
ting range for acceleration/deceleration times is 0.00 to 600.00 (s).
Note 2. When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to default settings. (The open loop
vector control default settings are given above.)
Note 3. The default setting of the Inverter will differ depending on its capacity. (The value for the
200-V-class 0.4-kW Inverter is given above.)
Note 4. When the control mode is changed, the Inverter will revert to the setting range. (The open loop
vector control setting range is given above.)
5-91
Parameter Register Class 64 (Hex) Name Setting Setting unit Default Changes
No. (Hex)
No range setting d ring
during
d1-01 0280 01 43 Frequency reference 1 0.00
0 00 to
o max.
a 0.01
0 0 Hz (Set
(Se 6.00 Yes
d1-02 0281 01 44 Frequency reference 2 f
frequency i
using 0.00 Yes
o1-03 )
o1-03.)
d1-08 0287 01 4A Frequency reference 8 0.00 Yes
d1-09 0288 01 4B Jog frequency 6.00 Yes
reference
d2-01 0289 01 4C Reference frequency 0.0 to 110.0 0.1% 100.0 No
upper limit
d2-02 028A 01 4D Reference frequency 0.0 to 109.0 0.1% 0.0 No
lower limit
d3-01 028B 01 4E Jump frequency 1 0.0
0 0 to
o 400.0
00 0 0.1 Hz
0 0.0
0 0 No
d3-02 028C 01 4F Jump frequency 2 No
d3-03 028D 01 50 Jump frequency 3 No
d3-04 028E 01 51 Jump frequency width 0.0 to 20.0 0.1 Hz 1.0 No
d4-01 028F 01 52 Reference frequency 0 or 1 1 0 No
hold function selection
d4-02 0290 01 53 Trim control level 0 to 100 1% 25 No
d5-01 0291 01 54 Torque control selection 0 or 1 1 0 No
d5-02 0292 01 55 Torque reference delay 0 to 1,000 1 ms 0 No
time
d5-03 0293 01 56 Speed limit selection 1 or 2 1 1 No
d5-04 0294 01 57 Speed limit –120 to 120 1% 0 No
d5-05 0295 01 58 Speed limit bias 0 to 120 1% 10 No
d5-06 0296 01 59 Speed/torque control 0 to 1,000 1 ms 0 No
switching timer.

No. (Hex)
No unit
nit setting d ring
during
E1-01 0300 01 5A Input voltage setting 155 to 255 (155 1V 200 (400) No
to 510)
E1-02 0301 01 5B Motor selection 0 to 2 1 0 No
E1-03 0302 01 5C V/f pattern selection 0 to F 1 F No
E1-04 0303 01 5D Maximum frequency 40.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 60.0 No
(FMAX)
E1-05 0304 01 5E Maximum voltage 0.0 to 255.0 (0.0 0.1 V 200.0 No
(VMAX) to 510.0) (400.0)
E1-06 0305 01 5F Maximum voltage 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 60.0 No
frequency (FA)
E1-07 0306 01 60 Intermediate frequency 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 3.0 (See No
(FB) note 2.)
E1-08 0307 01 61 Intermediate voltage 0.0 to 255.0 (0.0 0.1 V 11.0 (22.0) No
(VC) to 510.0) (See note
2.)
E1-09 0308 01 62 Minimum frequency 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.5 (See No
(FMIN) note 2.)
5-92
E1-10 0309 01 63 Minimum voltage 0.0 to 255.0 (0.0 0.1 V 2.0 (4.0) No
(VMIN) to 510.0) (See note
2.)
E1-11 030A 01 64 Mid. output frequency B 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
E1-12 030B 01 65 Mid. output frequency 0.0 to 255.0 (0.0 0.1 V 0.0 No
voltage B to 510.0)
E1-13 030C 01 66 Base voltage 0.0 to 255.0 (0.0 0.1 V 0.0 No
to 510.0)
E2-01 030E 01 67 Motor rated current 0.32 to 6.40 (See 0.01 A 1.90 (See No
note 4.) note 3.)
E2-02 030F 01 68 Motor rated slip 0.00 to 20.00 0.01 Hz 2.90 (See No
note 3.)
E2-03 0310 01 69 Motor no-load current 0.00 to 2.90 (See 0.01 A 1.20 (See No
note 5.) note 3.)
E2-04 0311 01 6A Number of motor poles 2 to 48 1 4 No
E2-05 0312 01 6B Motor phase-to-phase 0.000 to 65.000 0.001 Ω 9.842 No
resistance (See note
3.)
E2-06 0313 01 6C Motor leakage 0.0 to 40.0 0.1% 18.2 (See No
inductance note 3.)
E2-07 0314 01 6D Motor iron-core 0.00 to 0.50 0.01 0.50 No
saturation coefficient 1
E2-08 0315 01 6E Motor iron-core 0.00 to 0.75 0.01 0.75 No
saturation coefficient 2
E2-09 0316 01 6F Mechanical loss 0.0 to 10.0 0.1% 0.0 No
E2-10 0325 --- --- Torque compensation 0 to 65,535 1W 14 (See No
motor iron loss note 3.)
E3-01 0317 --- --- Select control method 0 to 3 1 2 No
of motor 2
E4-01 0318 --- --- Motor 2 maximum 40.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 60.0 No
frequency
E4-02 0319 --- --- Motor 2 maximum 0.0 to 255.0 (0.0 0.1 V 200.0 No
voltage to 510.0) (400.0)
E4-03 031A --- --- Motor 2 maximum 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 60.0 No
voltage frequency
E4-04 031B --- --- Motor 2 intermediate 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 3.0 (See No
frequency note 2.)
E4-05 031C --- --- Motor 2 intermediate 0.0 to 255.0 (0.0 0.1 V 11.0 (22.0) No
voltage to 510.0) (See note
2.)
E4-06 031D --- --- Motor 2 minimum 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.5 (See No
frequency note 2.)
E4-07 031E --- --- Motor 2 minimum 0.0 to 255.0 (0.0 0.1 V 2.0 (4.0) No
voltage to 510.0) (See note
2.)
E5-01 031F --- --- Motor 2 rated current 0.32 to 6.40 (See 0.01 A 1.90 (See No
note 4.) note 3.)
E5-02 0320 --- --- Motor 2 rated slip 0.00 to 20.00 0.01 Hz 2.90 (See No
note 3.)
E5-03 0321 --- --- Motor 2 no-load current 0.00 to 2.90 (See 0.01 A 1.20 (See No
note 5.) note 3.)
E5-04 0322 --- --- Motor 2 number of 2 to 48 1 pole 4 No
motor poles
E5-05 0323 --- --- Motor 2 phase-to-phase 0.000 to 65.000 0.001 Ω 9.842 No
resistance (See note
3.)
5-93
E5-06 0324 --- --- Motor 2 leakage 0.0 to 40.0 0.1% 18.2 (See No
inductance note 3.)

Note 3. The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter. The value for a 200-V-class 0.4-kW
Inverter is given above.
Note 5. The setting range is 0.00 to (motor’s rated current –0.1 A). The value for a 200-V-class 0.4-kW
S Option Parameters
No. (Hex)
No unit
nit setting during
d ring op-
F1-01 0380 01 70 Number of PG pulses 0 to 60,000 1 p/r 1,000 No
F1-02 0381 01 71 PG disconnection 0 to 3 1 1 No
stopping method
(PGO)
F1-03 0382 01 72 PG overspeed 0 to 3 1 1 No
stopping method
F1-04 0383 01 73 PG speed deviation 0 to 3 1 3 No
stopping method
F1-05 0384 01 74 PG rotation setting 0 or 1 1 0 No
F1-06 0385 01 75 PG output ratio 1 to 132 1 1 No
F1-07 0386 01 76 Selecting integral 0 or 1 1 0 No
control during
accel/decel.
F1-08 0387 01 77 Overspeed (OS) 0 to 120 1% 115 No
detection level.
F1-09 0388 01 78 Overspeed (OS) 0.0 to 2.0 0.1 s 0.0 (See No
detection time note 1.)
F1-10 0389 01 79 PG speed deviation 0 to 50 1% 10 No
detection level (DEV)
F1-11 038A 01 7A PG speed deviation 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 s 0.5 No
detection time (DEV)
F1-12 038B 01 7B Number of PG gear 0 to 1,000 1 0 No
teeth 1
F1-13 038C 01 7C Number of PG gear No
teeth 2
F1-14 0397 01 7D PG disconnection 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 s 2.0 No
detection time
F2-01 038D --- --- Analog Reference 0 or 1 1 0 No
Card selection
F3-01 038E --- --- Digital Reference 0 to 7 1 0 No
Card input selection
F4-01 038F --- --- Channel 1 output 1 to 38 (See note 1 2 No
monitor selection 2.)
F4-02 0390 --- --- Channel 1 gain 0.00 to 2.50 0.01 1.00 Yes
5-94
No. (Hex) unit setting during op-
F4-03 0391 --- --- Channel 2 output 1 to 38 (See note 1 3 No
monitor selection 2.)
F4-04 0392 --- --- Channel 2 gain 0.00 to 2.50 0.01 0.50 Yes
F4-05 03A0 --- --- Channel 1 bias –10.0 to 10.0 0.1% 0.0 Yes
F4-06 03A1 --- --- Channel 2 bias –10.0 to 10.0 0.1% 0.0 Yes
F5-01 0393 --- --- Not used. --- --- 0 ---
F5-02 0394 --- --- Not used. --- --- 1 ---
F6-01 0395 --- --- Not used. --- --- 0 ---
F7-01 0396 --- --- Output pulse multiple 0 to 4 1 1 No
selection
F8-01 0398 --- --- Operation detection 0 to 3 1 1 No
communications error
(SYSMAC BUS)
F9-01 0399 --- --- Communications 0 or 1 1 0 No
selection
F9-02 039A --- --- Communications 0 or 1 1 0 No
detection selection
F9-03 039B --- --- Communications 0 to 3 1 1 No
operation selection
F9-04 039C --- --- Not used. --- 1 0 ---
F9-05 039E --- --- Not used. 0 or 1 1 1 ---
F9-06 039F --- --- DeviceNet operation 0 to 3 1 1 No
selection
Note 2. Within the setting range (1 to 38), 4, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 25, 28, 34, and 35 cannot be set, and 29
to 31 are not used.

No. (Hex)
No unit
nit setting d ring
during
H1-01 0400 01 7E Multi-function input 1: 0 to 77 Hex 24 No
terminal 3 selection
H1-02 0401 01 7F Multi-function input 2: 14 No
terminal 4 selection
H1-03 0402 01 80 Multi-function input 3: 3 (0) (See No
terminal 5 selection note 1.)
H2-01 0406 01 84 Multi-function contact 0 to 37 Hex 0 No
output: terminal 9 to
10.
H2-02 0407 01 85 Multi-function output 1 No
1: terminal 25.
H2-03 0408 01 86 Multi-function output 2 No
2: terminal 26.
5-95
H3-01 0409 01 87 Signal selection: 0 or 1 1 0 No
terminal 13 (Voltage)
H3-02 040A 01 88 Gain: terminal 13 0.0 to 1,000.0 0.1% 100.0 Yes
H3-03 040B 01 89 Bias: terminal 13 –100.0 to 100.0 0.1% 0.0 Yes
H3-04 040C 01 8A Multi-function analog 0 or 1 1 0 No
input signal selection:
terminal 16
H3-05 040D 01 8B Selection: terminal 16 0 to 1F 1 1F No
H3-06 040E 01 8C Gain: terminal 16 0.0 to 1,000.0 0.1% 100.0 Yes
H3-07 040F 01 8D Bias: terminal 16 –100.0 to 100.0 0.1% 0.0 Yes
H3-08 0410 01 8E Signal selection: 0 to 2 1 2 No
terminal 14
H3-09 0411 01 8F Selection: terminal 14 1 to 1F 1 1F No
H3-10 0412 01 90 Gain: terminal 14 0.0 to 1,000.0 0.1% 100.0 Yes
H3-11 0413 01 91 Bias: terminal 14 –100.0 to 100.0 0.1% 0.0 Yes
H3-12 0414 01 92 Analog input filter time 0.00 to 2.00 0.01 s 0.00 No
constant
H4-01 0415 01 93 Multi-function analog 1 to 38 (See note 1 2 No
output 1 selection: 2.)
terminal 21
H4-02 0416 01 94 Gain terminal 21 0.00 to 2.50 0.01% 1.00 Yes
H4-03 0417 01 95 Bias terminal 21 –10.0 to 10.0 0.1 0.0 Yes
H4-04 0418 01 96 Multi-function analog 1 to 38 (See note 1 3 No
output 2 selection: 2.)
terminal 23
H4-05 0419 01 97 Gain terminal 23 0.00 to 2.50 0.01 0.50 Yes
H4-06 041A 01 98 Bias terminal 23 –10.0 to 10.0 0.1% 0.0 Yes
H4-07 041B 01 99 Analog output signal 0 or 1 1 0 No
level selection
H5-01 041C --- --- Not used. --- --- 1F ---
H5-02 041D --- --- Not used. --- --- 3 ---
H5-03 041E --- --- Not used. --- --- 0 ---
H5-04 041F --- --- Not used. --- --- 3 ---
H5-05 0420 --- --- Not used. --- --- 1 ---
Note 2. Within the setting range (1 to 38), 4, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 25, 28, 34, and 35 cannot be set, and 29
to 31 are not used.
5-96

No. (Hex)
No unit
nit setting d ring
during
L1-01 0480 01 9A Motor protection 0 or 1 1 1 No
selection
L1-02 0481 01 9B Motor protection time 0.1 to 5.0 0.1 min 1.0 No
constant
L2-01 0482 04 9C Momentary power loss 0 to 2 1 0 No
selection
L2-02 0483 01 9D Momentary power loss 0.0 to 2.0 0.1 s 0.7 (See No
ridethru note 2.)
L2-03 0484 01 9E Minimum baseblock 0.1 to 5.0 0.1 s 0.5 (See No
time (BB) note 2.)
L2-04 0485 01 9F Voltage restart time 0.0 to 5.0 0.1 s 0.3 No
L2-05 0486 01 A0 Under voltage detection 150 to 210 (150 1V 190 (380) No
level (UV) to 420)
L2-06 0487 01 A1 Not used. --- --- 0.0 ---
L3-01 0488 01 A2 Stall prevention during 0 to 2 1 1 No
acceleration
L3-02 0489 01 A3 Stall prevention level 0 to 200 1% 150 No
during acceleration
L3-03 048A 01 A4 Stall prevention limit 0 to 100 1% 50 No
during acceleration
L3-04 048B 01 A5 Stall prevention during 0 to 2 1 1 No
deceleration
L3-05 048C 01 A6 Stall prevention during 0 to 2 1 1 No
run
L3-06 048D 01 A7 Stall prevention level 30 to 200 1% 160 No
during run
L4-01 0490 01 A8 Frequency detection 0.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
level
L4-02 0491 01 A9 Frequency detection 0.0 to 20.0 0.1 Hz 2.0 No
width
L4-03 0492 01 AA Frequency detection –400.0 to 400.0 0.1 Hz 0.0 No
level (+/–)
L4-04 0493 01 AB Frequency detection 0.0 to 20.0 0.1 Hz 2.0 No
width (+/–)
L4-05 0494 01 AC Operation when 0 or 1 1 0 No
lost
L5-01 0495 01 AD Number of auto restart 0 to 10 1 0 No
attempts
L5-02 0496 01 AE Auto restart operation 0 or 1 1 0 No
selection
L6-01 0498 01 AF Torque detection 0 to 4 1 0 No
selection 1
L6-02 0499 01 B0 Torque detection level 1 0 to 300 1% 150 No
L6-03 049A 01 B1 Torque detection time 1 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 s 0.1 No
L6-04 049B 01 B2 Torque detection 0 to 4 1 0 No
selection 2
L6-05 049C 01 B3 Torque detection level 2 0 to 300 1% 150 No
L6-06 049D 01 B4 Torque detection time 2 0.0 to 10.0 0.1 s 0.1 No
5-97
L7-01 049E 01 B5 Forward torque limit 0 to
o 300 1%
% 200
00 No
L7-02 049F 01 B6 Reverse torque limit No
L7-03 04A0 01 B7 Forward regenerative No
torque limit
L7-04 04A1 01 B8 Reverse regenerative No
torque limit
L8-01 04A4 01 B9 DB resistor protection 0 or 1 1 0 No
L8-02 04A5 01 BA Inverter overheat 50 to 130 1°C 95 No
detection pre-alarm
level
L8-03 04A6 01 BB Operation after Inverter 0 to 3 1 3 No
overheat pre-alarm
L8-05 04A8 01 BC Input open-phase 0 or 1 1 0 No
L8-07 04AA 01 BD Output open-phase 0 or 1 1 0 No
L8-10 04AD 01 BE Ground fault protection 0 or 1 1 1 No
operation selection
L8-17 04B4 --- --- Low-speed carrier 0 to 3 1 1 No
frequency reduction
selection (2)
L8-19 04B6 --- --- Low-speed Inverter 0 or 1 1 0 No
overload (OL2)
characteristic selection

Note 2. The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter. The value for a 200-V-class 0.4-kW
5-98
No. (Hex)
No unit
nit setting during
d ring op-
o1-01 0500 01 BF Monitor selection 4 to 38 1 6 Yes
o1-02 0501 01 C0 Monitor selection after 1 to 4 1 1 Yes
power-on
o1-03 0502 01 C1 Frequency reference 0 to 39,999 1 0 No
setting and display
units
o1-04 0503 01 C2 V/f pattern setting 0 or 1 1 0 No
units
o1-05 0504 01 C3 Not used. --- --- 0 ---
o2-01 0505 01 C4 Local/Remote Key 0 or 1 1 1 No
o2-02 0506 01 C5 Stop Key 0 or 1 1 1 No
o2-03 0507 --- --- User constant initial 0 to 2 1 0 No
values
o2-04 0508 01 C6 Inverter capacity 0 to FF (See 1 0 (See No
selection note.) note.)
o2-05 0509 01 C7 Frequency reference 0 or 1 1 0 No
setting method
o2-06 050A 01 C8 Operation selection 0 or 1 1 0 No
when Digital Operator
is disconnected
o2-07 050B --- --- Cumulative operation 0 to 65,535 1 hr 0 No
time setting
o2-08 050C --- --- Cumulative operation 0 or 1 1 0 No
time selection
o2-09 050D 01 C9 Factory use --- --- 0 ---
Note The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter. The value for a 200-V-class 0.4-kW Inverter
is given above.
5-99
6
Chapter 6
Communications Errors
6-1 Communications Line Errors
6-2 Message Communications Errors
6-3 Special Remote I/O Errors
6-4 Inverter Faults
Communications Errors Chapter 6
6-1 Communications Line Errors

Malfunctions in DeviceNet communications that are a result of broken wires, short circuits, reversed
wiring, duplicate node address assignments, or noise interference are detected as transmission (BUS)
errors. When a transmission error is detected, the Inverter’s Fault Bit will turn ON and the motor will
coast to a stop. (For Inverters with a software version of 1042 or later, the operation when a communica-
tions error occurs can be set using constant F9-06.)
When an error is detected, perform error processing according to the indicator display of the DeviceNet
H Operation Indicators
The DeviceNet Communications Card has 4 operation indicators that show the status of the power and
communications.
Indicator Display Meaning
g Countermeasures
Color Status
PWR Green Lit Power is being supplied from the Inverter ---
to the Card.
--- Not lit Power is not being supplied from the In- Check the Option Card con-
verter. nector and turn ON the Invert-
The Card is not connected properly and er power supply.
power is not being supplied to it. Replace the Option Card.
MS Green Lit The Card is operating normally. ---
Flashing Initial settings or necessary preparations Turn ON the Inverter power
for communications are incomplete. supply again.
Replace the Option Card.
Red Lit A fatal error (hardware error) has occurred Turn ON the Inverter power
in the Card. supply again.
Flashing A non-fatal error, such as a switch setting Check the baud rate setting.
error, has occurred. Turn ON the Inverter power
supply again.
power is not being to supplied to it. Replace the Option Card.
6-2
Indicator Display Meaning Countermeasures

Color Status
NS Green Lit The DeviceNet Network is operating nor- ---
mally.
(Communications connections estab-
lished.)
Flashing The Network is normal, but the commu- Turn ON the power supply
nications connection with the Master Unit again after the following steps.
is not established. • Register in the scan list.
• Turn ON the power supply to
the Master Unit.
Red Lit A fatal communications error has oc- Turn ON the power supply
curred. again after the following steps.
A DeviceNet communications error was • Correct node address du-
detected caused by node address duplica- plication.
tion or Bus OFF. (These errors make com-
munications impossible.) • Connect termination resis-
tance to both ends of the com-
munications line.
• Correct the Master Unit errors
that occur when the Master
Unit stops after communica-
tions is once established.
• Correct environmental condi-
tions such as noise.
Flashing A non-fatal communications error has oc- Turn ON the power supply
curred due to communications timeout. again after the following pro-
cessing.
• Connect termination resis-
tance to both ends of the com-
munications line.
• Correct defective connec-
tions in the communications
line.
• Correct environmental condi-
tions such as noise.
--- Not lit A DeviceNet Network error has occurred. Check the baud rate setting.
For example, the Network does not exist, Check the Option Card con-
power is not supplied to the Card, or the nector and turn ON the Invert-
baud rates do not match. er power supply.
6-3
Indicator Display Meaning Countermeasures

Color Status
WD Green Flashing The CPU Unit of the Card is operating nor- ---
mally.
Red Lit The CPU Unit of the Card is not ready or Check the Option Card con-
the CPU Unit has malfunctioned. nector and turn ON the Invert-
er power supply.
power is not being to supplied to it. Replace the Option Card.
Note 1. When both of the baud rate setting pins DR0 and DR1 are set to ON, both the MS and NS will
be lit in red.
Note 2. For communications line problems, detailed error codes will be displayed on the indicators of
the Master Unit. Check the error code and take appropriate countermeasures according to
the descriptions in Chapter 15 Troubleshooting and Maintenance of DeviceNet (Compo-
Bus/D) Operation Manual (W267).
6-4
6-2 Message Communications Errors
H Explicit Message Errors

If an explicit message is sent, but communications do not end normally, one of the following error codes
will be returned with service code 94. Check the meaning of the error message, and either correct the
message or adjust the timing of the message.
Error Meaning Countermeasures
Code
0000 Normal end response. ---
08FF The requested service does not exist. Correct the service code and send the data
again.
09FF An invalid attribute was detected. Check and correct the attribute values, and
send the data again.
0CFF The requested service cannot be executed in Stop the Inverter and send the data again.
the current object mode or status.
0EFF A request has been sent to change an attribute Check and correct the service code and
that cannot be changed. attribute values, and send the data again.
13FF There is insufficient data to execute the service. Correct the data size and send the data again.
14FF The attribute for the service does not exist. Check and correct the service code and
attribute values, and send the data again.
15FF These is too much data to execute the service. Correct the data size and send the data again.
16FF The specified object does not exist. Check and correct the class and instance
values, and send the data again.
20FF The parameters are invalid or the data is Check and correct the data setting range, send
outside the range for the requested service. the data again.
1FFF Manufacturer fault code. Stop the Inverter and send the data again.
Check and correct the data setting range, send
the data again.
6-5
6-3 Special Remote I/O Errors
H Special Remote I/O Errors

If each function is not set properly using the special remote I/O, the MSB of the function code will be
changed to 1 and one of the following error codes will be returned. Check the meaning of the error mes-
sage, and either correct the message or adjust the timing of the message.
Error Code Meaning
--- Normal operation response.
When sending data, the code will be returned with the function code and register number
followed by the amount of data being written or read data.
01 Function code error: A function code that is not supported has been received.
02 Invalid register number: A register number that is not registered has been received.
21 Data setting error: The data is outside the specified range or does not comply with the
constant restrictions.
22 Write mode error: Attempted write during operation, during UV, or while there was a CPU
Unit error, or attempted write to a read-only register.
24 Attempted write during constant processing (busy status).
Note The MSB of the function code will be returned as 1 when there is a communications failure.
H Enter Command
When entering data in the parameter constant (register No. 0100 or higher), be sure to send an enter
command. If the enter command is not transmitted after writing data, the following situation will occur.
• Written data will not be enabled.
Written data will be enabled only after an enter command is sent.
• Inverter will not start.
The Inverter will determine the state as being under programming until it receives an enter command
and will ignore the start or run command.
After sending an enter command, input the start or run command again.
6-6
6-4 Inverter Faults
H Detecting Inverter Faults

When a fault is detected in the Inverter itself, the status will change as shown in the following table.
Function Inverter Fault Status
Remote I/O The fault output allocated in the remote I/O will turn ON.
If the fault output is ON, turn OFF all related inputs controlling the Inverter,
and program a sequence to stop the program.
Explicit messages Read the fault output for Class 29, Instance 1, Attribute 0A using message
communications. If there is a fault in the Inverter, the fault output will be ON,
so turn OFF all related inputs controlling the Inverter, and program a
sequence to stop the program.
Special remote I/O Read register 0010, and check whether bit 07 (fault output) is ON (serious
fault). If bit 07 is ON, turn OFF all related inputs controlling the Inverter, and
program a sequence to stop the program.
H Confirming Inverter Fault Status

The fault information for the Inverter can be checked by using the following methods. Perform trouble-
shooting based on the information corresponding to the fault and refer to maintenance information in
the Inverter User’s Manual (3G3RV: I532, 3G3PV: I537, 3G3FV: I516).
Function Inverter Error Status
Operation indicators on When there is an Inverter fault, the details will be displayed on the Digital
Inverter Operator of the Inverter. The fault log can be checked using the monitor
function (U3).
Explicit messages Read the fault code for Class 29, Instance 1, Attribute 0D using message
communications. The code corresponding to the Inverter fault is specified.
Special remote I/O Read registers 0014 to 0018. Check the fault status from the bit signals that
are output for an Inverter fault. The fault log can be checked using the
monitor function (U3) in registers 0090 to 0093.
H Memory Data Backup

The SYSDRIVE 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Inverter uses EEPROM for the data backup. Data is written to
EEPROM when the parameters change or the power is turned OFF.
• Data can be written to EEPROM up to 100,000 times.
• Parameters are always written to EEPROM when they are changed using DeviceNet communica-
tions, so limit the times that parameters are written to EEPROM as much as possible.
(With the special I/O, data will be written to EEPROM when an enter command is received.)
• Frequency reference and control command (register numbers 0000 to 000F for the special I/O) and
the Net Control Bit and Net Reference Bit are not written to RAM or EEPROM. When the power is
turned OFF, any specified values are cleared.
6-7
7
Chapter 7
Communications
Programs (SYSMAC CS-series PCs)
7-1 Standard Remote I/O Programming
7-2 Message Communications Programming
7-3 Special Remote I/O Programs
Communications Programs (SYSMAC CS-series PCs) Chapter 7
Note In this chapter, the bits, words, and data memory used in the ladder pro-
grams are selected at random. When creating actual programs, modify the
contents so that they do not overlap with other areas.
7-1 Standard Remote I/O Programming

When the following standard remote I/O programming is executed, the rotational speed reference data
specified in the DM (Data Memory) Area of the PC is written to the 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Inverter and
forward or reverse operation is performed at the specified frequency when the Frequency Reference
Input Bit is turned ON and the Forward Input Bit or Reverse Input Bit is turned ON.
S Allocations
Bit 000000 Frequency Reference Input Bit
Bit 000001 Forward Input Bit
Bit 000002 Reverse Input Bit
Bit 000003 Fault Reset Input Bit
Bit 001000 Local/Network selection Bit
Bit 003000 Fault Flag
D00000 Rotational speed reference data
D Remote I/O: Outputs from PC to 3G3MV Inverter Words n and n + 1

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
n Rightmost 0 --- Net Net --- --- Fault Reverse/ Forward/
Reference Control Reset Stop Stop
Leftmost 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
n+1 Rightmost 2 Rotational speed reference data
Leftmost 3 Rotational speed reference data
D Remote I/O: Inputs from 3G3MV Inverter to PC Words m and m + 1

m Rightmost 0 At Reference Control Inverter During During Alarm Fault
Frequency From Net From Net Ready Reverse Forward
Run Run
Leftmost 1 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
m+1 Rightmost 2 Rotational speed reference data
Leftmost 3 Rotational speed reference data
7-2
S Timing Chart
000000
(Frequency Reference Input Bit)
000001
(Forward Input Bit)
000002
(Reverse Input Bit)
Word m bit 2
(During Forward Run)
Word m bit 3
(During Reverse Run)
Rotational speed reference data D00000 (rotational speed reference data transmitted to words n + 1)
003000 (Fault Flag)
000003 (Fault Reset Input Bit)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
S Operation
1. When the Frequency Reference Input Bit turns ON, the rotational speed reference data specified in
D00000 is moved to remote I/O output word n + 1.
2. When the Forward Input Bit turns ON, remote I/O word n bit 0 (Forward/Stop) will turn ON, and for-
ward operation will start. During forward operation, remote I/O word m bit 2 (During Forward Run)
will be ON.
3. When the Forward Input Bit turns OFF, remote I/O word m bit 2 (During Forward Run) will turn OFF
after operation will decelerate to a stop.
4. When the Reverse Input Bit turns ON, remote I/O word n bit 1 (Reverse/Stop) will turn ON, and re-
verse operation will start. During reverse operation, remote I/O word m bit 3 (During Reverse Run)
will be ON.
5. When the Reverse Input Bit turns OFF, remote I/O word m bit 3 (During Reverse Run) will turn OFF
after operation decelerates to a stop.
6. When the remote I/O Fault Bit (word m bit 0) turns ON, the Fault Flag will turn ON.
7. When the Fault Reset Input Bit turns ON, remote I/O word n bit 2 (Fault Reset Input Bit) will turn ON,
and the fault will be cleared. When the fault is reset, the Fault Flag will turn OFF simultaneously.
7-3
S Ladder Program
001000
DIFU (013)
001001
DIFD (014)
001002
During forward run During reverse run

001001 (word m bit 2) (word m bit 3)
001003
001003 001002 See note

001004
001004
001004
Net control
(word n bit 5)
Net reference
(word n bit 6)
000000
MOV (021) Speed reference setting
D00000
n+1
Reverse Operation
000001 (word m bit 3) 003000
Forward/Stop Bit
(word n bit 0)
Forward Operation
000002 (word m bit 2) 003000
Reverse/Stop Bit
(word n bit 1)
Fault Bit
(word m bit 0) 000003
Fault Flag
(003000)
003000
000003
Fault Reset Input Bit
(word n bit 2)
Note This program is not required if the b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) is set to “3” and b1-02
(Inverter Operation Command Selection) is set to “3.”
7-4
7-2 Message Communications Programming
7-2-1 Inverter Fault Processing

The message communications programming example given here reads and stores the fault data using
explicit messages for fault outputs from the Inverter. If the Inverter has a fault, the remote I/O input’s
Fault Bit (word m bit 0) will turn ON. Be sure to turn OFF the Run Command Bits (word n bits 0 and 1). In
this program example, the fault code is stored in D00200.
If commands are interrupted by faults, store the completion code in the DM Area and re-execute the
command. When a fault occurs, check the contents of the fault and take countermeasures referring to
information provided in the SYSDRIVE Inverter User’s Manual (3G3RV: I532, 3G3PV: I537, 3G3FV:
I516).
S Allocations
Bit 003000 Fault Flag
Bit 000000 Fault Code Read Flag
Bit 000001 IOWR Write Completed Flag
Bit 000002 Response Flag
Bit 003003 Sending Message Flag
Bit 003002 Message Sent Flag
Bit 000100 Reset Input Bit
D00000 Slave node address (3G3MV Inverter)
Response Storage Words

D03000 Command Code: 2801
D03001 Completion Code
D03002 Number of Received Bytes
D03003 Node Address, Service Code (8E: Normal read, 94: Error)
D03004 Read Data or Error Code
D00100 Error Code for Error Response
D00200 Error Code for Inverter Error
7-5
S Timing Chart
Word m bit 0
(Fault Bit)
000000
(Fault Read Flag)
003003
(Sending Message Flag)
003002
(Message Sent Flag)
CMND instruction execution
000001
(CMND Write Completed Flag)
000002
(Response Flag)
A20200 (Message Communica-

tions Enabled Flag)
003000 (Fault Flag)
000100 (Reset Input Bit)

D00200 (Fault code storage) Fault code
1. 2. 3.
S Operation
1. When the Inverter has a fault, bit 0 of word m (Fault Bit) will be turned ON. Until the fault is cleared,
the Fault Flag will be turn ON, and this will cause the Fault Read Flag to be turned ON, and the com-
mand specified in the DM Area will be sent using the CMND instruction.
2. When the Message Communications Enabled Flag is turned ON, the completion code (D03001) will
be examined. If an error is found, the error code will be stored in D00100 and re-send message. If
normally completed, the fault code will be stored in D00200 and the Message Sent Flag will be
turned ON, and the Sending Message Flag will be turned OFF.
3. When the Reset Input Bit is turned ON, bit 2 of word n (Fault Reset Input Bit) will turn ON. When the
fault is cleared, the Fault Flag will turn OFF.
S Network Configuration
This program is based on the following conditions.
Master unit number: 0
Master node address: 63
Fixed allocation area setting: 1
Network Communications Enabled Flag: A20200
Online Flag: 151100
Network Communications Error Flag: A21900
7-6
S Ladder Program
Fault (Wd m, bit 00)
No. of send data bytes

Fault (Wd m, bit 00)
Fault Flag
No. of received bytes
Fault reset
Wd n, bit 02 Network address
Send destination node address: 63

Send destination unit number: FE
Response required
Communications port No. 0
Number of resends: 0
Response monitor time:

Sets the node address 10 s
of the Slave for reading.
Explicit message
command
Slave node address and

service code: OE Hex
Class ID
Clears the storage area, and
sets 1 in word 0000 (used for
shift register).
Instance ID
Attribute ID
Sets CMND data.
7-7
151100
(Online Flag)
A20200
(Network Com-
munications Executes CMND instruction.
Enabled Flag)
A21900 (Network Com-

munications Error Flag)
Confirms execution of CMND instruction.
A20200
(Network A21900 (Network Com-
Commu- munications Error Flag)
nications
Enabled
Flag) 151100
(Online Flag)
The completion code examined. If
an error is found, the command is
A20200
re-executed. If the command is
(Network Com-
executed normally, the data is
munications
stored in D00200.
Enabled Flag)
Equals Flag
(P_EQ)
Equals Flag
(P_EQ)
#0000
0000
7-8
7-2-2 Reading/Writing Data

This programming example writes and reads data using explicit messages. Explicit messages can be
executed by specifying FINS commands in the DM Area allocated to the PC, and sending them using
the CMND or IOWR instructions.
If there is an error in the command, the completion code is stored in the DM Area and the command is
re-executed.
S Allocations
Bit 001000 Program Start Input Bit
Bit 000000 Message Execution Flag
Bit 000001 Command Write Flag
Bit 000002 Response Flag
Bit 003000 Sending Message Flag
Bit 003001 Message Sent Flag
D00000 Slave node address (3G3MV Inverter)

D00001 Service code; 0E: Read, 10: Write
D00002 Number of command data bytes (Hex)
D00003 Class ID (Hex)
D00004 Instance ID (Hex)
D00005 Attribute ID (Hex)
D00006 to D00009 Write data (Hex) (See note)
Note If the written data size is “Word,” set in the order of the rightmost bits and leftmost bits.
Response Storage Words
D03000 Command Code: 2801

D03001 Completion Code
D03002 Number of Received Bytes
D03003 Node Address, Service Code (8E: Normal read, 90: Normal write, 94: Error)
D03004 to D00009 Read Data or Error Code
D00100 Storage Area for Communications Error Completion Codes
7-9
S Timing Chart
001000
(Program Start Input Bit)
001001
(Start Switch ON)
000000
(Message Execution Flag)
003000
(Sending Message Flag)
003001
(Message Sent Flag)
CMND instruction execution
000001 CMND Write

Completed Flag
000002 Response Flag
Enabled Flag
Completion code error
D00100
(Completion code storage)
1. 2. 3.
S Operation
1. When the Program Start Input Bit is turned ON, the Message Execution Flag will turn ON, and the
command specified in the DM Area will be sent using the IOWR instruction.
2. When the Message Communications Enabled Flag is turned ON, the completion code (D03001) is
examined. If an error is found, the completion code is stored in D00100, and the command is re-
executed.
3. If the completion code of the response is normal, the Message Sent Flag will be turned ON, and the
Sending Message Flag will be turned OFF.
S Network Configuration
This program is based on the following conditions.
Master unit number: 0
Master node address: 63
Fixed allocation area setting: 1
Network Communications Enabled Flag: A20200
Online Flag: 151100
Network Communications Error Flag: A21900
7-10
S Ladder Program
/ (430)
Equals Flag (P_EQ)

+C (402)
+C (402)
Converts command specified Converts command specified

in DM Area to CMND data. in DM Area to CMND data.
7-11
151100
(Online Flag)
A20200
(Network Commu-
nications Enabled
Flag)
Executes CMND instruction.

munications Error Flag)

A20200 munications Error Flag)
(Network
Commu-
nications
Enabled
Flag) Confirms execution of CMND instruction.
151100
(Online Flag)
A20200
(Network Com-
munications En-
abled Flag)
Equals Flag
(P_EQ)
Equals Flag
(P_EQ)
Sets CMND data.
7-12
7-3 Special Remote I/O Programs
7-3-1 Simple Operation Programs

This section describes examples of simple operation programming using special remote I/O for a
3G3RV Inverter. To use special remote I/O, it is necessary to switch the remote I/O operation. Refer to
5-2 Switching Remote I/O Operation and change to the special remote I/O operation.
Once the Program Start Input Bit is turned ON, Inverter operations will continue until the Program End
Input is turned ON. The frequency (speed) reference specified in the DM Area (D01000) of the PC is
repeatedly set in the Inverter. The output frequency value will be repeatedly read and stored in the DM
Area (D02000). The Inverter status will also be read repeatedly and stored in words (0020**) allocated
in the PC.
If any communications error occurs, the program will stop and a stop command will be sent to the
Inverter. This state will continue until the Communications Fault Reset Input Bit is turned ON.
Note 3G3RV Inverters support special remote I/O from version VSF105091 (Asian models: Version
VSF105081).
Note Write the program so that the Inverter operation commands (001000 and 001001) will be turned
OFF when the Fault Bit (002014) of the Inverter status turns ON, and also take appropriate coun-
termeasures according to maintenance information in the SYSDRIVE Inverter User’s Manual.
(3G3RV: I532, 3G3PV: I537, 3G3FV: I516)
S Allocations
D Inverter Control Input Word Allocation

Word Function
001000 Forward/Stop (1: forward) Bit
001001 Reverse/Stop (1: reverse) Bit
001002 Multi-function Input 3 Bit
001004 Multi-function Input 5 Bit (Reset input)
001007 Not used.
001008 External Fault Input (1: EFO) Bit
001009 Fault Reset (1: reset) Bit
7-13
D Inverter Status Word Allocation
Word Function
002000 Operation 1: Operating
002001 Zero speed 1: Zero speed
002002 Frequency matching 1: Matched
002003 User-defined speed matching 1: Matched
002004 Frequency detection 1 1: Output frequency ≤
L4-01
002005 Frequency detection 2 1: Output frequency ≥
L4-01
002006 Inverter startup completed 1: Startup
completed
002007 Low voltage detection 1: Detected
002008 Baseblock 1: Inverter output baseblock
002009 Frequency reference mode 1: Not
communications 0: Communications
002010 Run command mode 1: Not communications
0: Communications
002011 Overtorque detection 1: Detected
002012 Frequency reference lost 1: Lost
002013 Retrying error 1: Retrying
002014 Fault (including RS-422A/485 communications
time-out) 1: fault occurred
002015 Communications time-out 1: Timed out
D Program-related Bits Used

Word Function
000000 Program Start Input Bit
000001 Program End Input Bit
000002 Program Execution Flag
000003 Communications Error Reset Input Bit
000004 Inverter Stop Command Flag
000100 Frequency Reference Write Flag
000101 Control Input Write Flag
000102 Output Frequency Read Flag
000103 Inverter Status Read Flag
000300 Frequency Reference Write Completed Flag
000301 Control Input Write Completed Flag
000302 Output Frequency Read Completed Flag
000303 Inverter Status Read Completed Flag
003110 Communications Error Flag
D Inverter Control Input

Word Function
D01000 Reference frequency setting
D02000 Output frequency monitor
7-14
D Remote I/O Allocation Areas
I/O classification Word address 15 to 8 7 to 0
Output n Register number (leftmost bits) Function code (10: Write, 03:
(PC to Inverter) Read)
n+1 Register data (leftmost bits) Register number (rightmost
bits)
n+2 Not used Register data (rightmost bits)
Input m Register number (leftmost bits) Function code (10: Write, 03:
(Inverter to PC) Read)
m+1 Register data (leftmost bits) Register number (rightmost
bits)
m+2 Not used Register data (rightmost bits)
S Timing Chart
000000 (Program Start Input Bit)
000001 (Program End Input Bit) or

003110 (Communications Error Flag)
000002 (Program Execution Flag)
000100 (Frequency Reference

Write Flag)
000101 (Control Input Write Flag)
000102 (Output Frequency

Read Flag)
000103 (Inverter Status Read Flag)
000300 (Control Input Write

Completed Flag)
000301 (Frequency Reference

Write Completed Flag)
000302 (Output Frequency
Read Completed Flag)
000303 (Inverter Status Read

Completed Flag)
000004 (Inverter Stop
Command Flag)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
7-15
S Operation
1. When the Program Start Input Bit is turned ON, the Program Execution Input Bit will be set to self-
holding and the Frequency Reference Write Flag will be turned ON. When the Frequency Refer-
ence Write Flag is ON, the frequency reference data in D01000 will be transferred to the Inverter.
When the Frequency Reference Write Completed Flag is turned ON, the Frequency Reference
Write Flag will be turned OFF and the Control Input Write Flag will be turned ON. (Bits are shifted to
achieve this.)
2. When the Control Input Write Flag is turned ON, the Inverter control input specified in word 0010 will
be transferred to the Inverter. When the Control Input Write Completed Flag is turned ON, the Con-
trol Input Write Flag will be turned OFF and the Output Frequency Reference Read Flag will be
turned ON. (Bits are shifted to achieve this.)
3. When the Output Frequency Read Flag is turned ON, the output frequency of the Inverter will be
read. When the Output Frequency Read Completed Flag is turned ON, the read output frequency
will be stored in D02000, the Output Frequency Read Flag will be turned OFF, and the Inverter Sta-
tus Read Flag will be turned ON. (Bits are shifted to achieve this.)
4. When the Inverter Status Read Flag is turned ON, the Inverter status will be read. When the Inverter
Status Read Completed Flag is turned ON, the read Inverter status will be transferred to word 0020,
the Inverter Status Read Flag will be turned OFF, and the Frequency Reference Write Flag will be
turned ON. Setting the Frequency Reference Write Flag to ON will repeat the above steps 1 to 4.
5. When the Program End Input Bit is turned ON, the Inverter stop command will be written in the
Inverter. (When word m bit 7 turns ON, communications errors will be detected and the Communica-
tions Error Flag will be turned ON and will be self-holding. While this flag remains ON, the system will
perform the same processing as when the Program End Input Bit is turned ON. When the Commu-
nications Error Reset Input Bit is turned ON, the self-holding state will be cleared.)
7-16
S Ladder Program
000000 000004 000103

DIFU (013) MOV (021)
003000 #0003
000004 D00100
003000
MOV (021)
000002
Reads Inverter status. #002C
000002
003000 D00101
MOV (021)
#0001 000100
003002
0001
000100 000101
MOV (021)
#0010 000102
D00100
000103
ANDW (034)
D01000 003002
XFER (070)
#FF00
#0002
D00101
D00100
ORW (035) n
D00101
#0002 MOVD (083)
D00101 D00102
#0010
ANDW (034)
n+2
Sets frequency reference. D01000
000100
#00FF CMP (020)
D00102 #0010
000101 m
MOV (021)
#0010 Equals Flag (P_EQ)
003100
D00100
ANDW (034) ANDW (034)

0010 m+1
#FF00 #00FF
D00101 D01002
ORW (035) CMP (020)
#0001 #0002
D00101 D01002
ANDW (034) Equals Flag (P_EQ)
Sets control input. 0010 003101
#00FF
003100 003101
D00102 ASL (025)
000102
0001
MOV (021)
#0003
000300
D00100
MOV (021)
#0024
Reads output frequency. D00101
7-17
000103
000101 CMP (020)
CMP (020)
#0003
#0010
m
m Equals Flag (P_EQ)
003107
Equals Flag (P_EQ)
003103
ANDW (034)
m+1
ANDW (034)
#00FF
m+1
D01002
#00FF
D01002 CMP (020)

#002C
CMP (020) D01002
#0001 Equals Flag (P_EQ)
D01002 003108
Equals Flag (P_EQ)

003104 003107 003108
ANDW (034)
m+1
003103 003104
ASL (025) #FF00
0001 D01003
000301 ANDW (034)

000102
m+2
CMP (020)
#00FF
#0003
D01004
m
Equals Flag (P_EQ)
ORW (035)
003105
D01003
ANDW (034) D01004
m+1 0020
#00FF
D01002 MOV (021)

#0001
CMP (020)
0001
#0024
D01002 000303
Equals Flag (P_EQ) 000002
003106 ANDW (034)
003105 003106 m
ANDW (034)
#0080
m+1
D01005
#FF00
D01003 CMP (020)

#0080
ANDW (034)
D01005
m+2 Equals Flag (P_EQ)
#00FF 003109
D01004 003109 000003

003110
ORW (035) 003110
D01003
D01004 003110
000004
D02000
000001
ASL (025)
0001
000302
7-18
000004
MOV (021)
Executes stop command.
#0000
0001
MOV (021)
#0010
D00100
MOV (021)
#0001
D00101
MOV (021)
#0000
D00102
XFER (070)
#0002
D00100
MOVD (083)
D00102
#0010
n+2
7-3-2 Reading Parameter Data

This programming example is designed to read the parameter data specified in the
3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Inverter. To use special remote I/O, it is necessary to switch the remote I/O op-
eration. Refer to 5-2 Switching Remote I/O Operation and change to the special remote I/O operation.
S Allocation
Bit 000000 Read Parameter Input Bit
Bit 000002 Faulty Data Reset Input Bit
Bit 003000 Data Read Flag
Bit 003001 Faulty Data Flag
Bit 003005 Data Read Completed Flag
D00000 Register number of the parameter to be read

D00001 Read data
7-19
I/O classification Word 15 to 8 7 to 0
Output n Register number (leftmost Function code (10: Write, 03:
(PC to Inverter) byte) Read)
n+1 Register data (leftmost byte) Register number (rightmost
byte)
n+2 Not used. Register data (rightmost byte)
Input m Register number (leftmost Function code (10: Write, 03:
(Inverter to PC) byte) Read)
m+1 Register data (leftmost byte) Register number (rightmost
byte)
m+2 Not used. Register data (rightmost byte)
S Timing Chart
000000 (Read Parameter Input Bit)
003000 (Data Read Flag)
003005 (Data Read Completed Flag)
Word n to n+2 (Send Data) Send Data (Read)
Word m to m+2 (Receive Data) Receive Data (Read)
1. 2.
S Operation
1. Set the register number of the parameter to be read in D00000. When the Read Parameter Input Bit
is turned ON, the Data Read Flag will be turned ON and parameter reading processing will be
executed.
2. If the data is normally read, the read parameter register number and data will be returned by the
Inverter. When the register number that was sent agrees with the received register number, the pa-
rameter data will be stored in D00001, the Data Read Completed Flag will be turned ON and the
Data Read Flag will be turned OFF.
Note If the send data is faulty, word m bit 7 will be turned ON, which will turn ON the Faulty Data Flag
and the program will be stopped until the Faulty Data Reset Input Bit (000002) is turned ON.
7-20
S Ladder Program
000000 (Read Parameter Input Bit) 003001
DIFU (013) 003002 003003
003005
000001
000001 003005 003001

003005
003000 MOV (021)
003000 m+1
D00201
000001
BSET (071) MOV (021)
#0000 m+2
D00200 D00202
D00209
ANDW (034)
ANDW (034) D00201
D00000 #FF00
#FF00 D00203
D00200
ANDW (034)
ORW (035) D00202
D00200 #00FF
#0003 D00204
D00205
ORW (035)
ANDW (034)
Transfers read data to D00203
D00000 D00001. D00204
#00FF
D00001
D00206
Word m bit 7 000002
XFER (070) 003001
#0002 003001
D00205
n Detects data errors.
MOVD (083)
Sets the function code to be #0000
read and register number. #0010
n+2
003000
CMP (020)
D00205
m
Equals Flag (P_EQ)

003002
ANDW (034)
m+1
#00FF
D00208
CMP (020)
D00206
D00208
Equals Flag (P_EQ)

003003
Confirms the completion of reading.
7-21
7-3-3 Writing Parameter Data

This programming example is designed to write the parameter data in the 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV
Inverter. After writing has been completed, be sure to send an enter command to enable the written data
as the Inverter operation data.
To use special remote I/O, it will be necessary to switch the remote I/O operation. Refer to 5-2 Switching
Remote I/O Operation and change to the special remote I/O operation.
S Allocations
Bit 000000 Write Parameter Input Bit
Bit 000002 Faulty Data Reset Input Bit
Bit 003000 Data Write Flag
Bit 003005 Data Agree Flag (Function Code and Register No.)
Bit 000100 Sending Written Data Flag
Bit 000101 Sending Enter Command Flag
Bit 000102 Setting “00” Function Code Flag
Bit 000103 Data Write Completed Flag
Bit 003010 Faulty Data Flag
D00000 Register number of the parameter to be written

D00001 Written data

I/O classification Word 15 to 8 7 to 0
Output n Register number (leftmost byte) Function code (10: Write, 03: Read)
(PC to Inverter)
I ) n+1 Register data (leftmost byte) Register number (rightmost byte)
n+2 Not used Register data (rightmost byte)
Input m Register number (leftmost byte) Function code (10: Write, 03: Read)
(I
(Inverter to PC) m+1 Register data (leftmost byte) Register number (rightmost byte)
m+2 Not used Register data (rightmost byte)
7-22
S Timing Chart
00000 (Write Parameter Input Bit)
03000 (Data Write Flag)
03005 (Data Agree Flag)
00100 (Sending Written Data Flag)
00101 (Sending Enter Command Flag)
00102 (Sending “00” Function Flag)
00103 (Data Write Completed Flag)
Word n to n+2 (Send Data) Send Data (Write) Enter Command “00” Function
Word m to m+2 (Receive Data) Send Data (Write) Enter Command “00” Function
1. 2. 3. 4.
S Operation
1. Set the register number of the parameter and the data to be written in D00000 and D00001 respec-
tively. When the Write Parameter Input Bit is turned ON, the Data Write Flag will be turned ON and
parameter writing processing will be executed.
2. If the data is properly written, the written parameter register number and the function code will be
returned from the Inverter. When the sent register number and the function code agree with the re-
ceived data contents, the Data Agree Flag will be turned ON to send the enter command.
3. If the enter command is normally received, the register number and function code that agree with
the enter command will be returned from the Inverter. When the sent register number and function
code agree with the received contents, the Data Agree Flag will be turned ON to send the function
code “00” (both the register number and function code are 0000).
4. In the same manner, if the function code “00” is normally received, the Data Agree Flag will be turned
ON and the Data Write Completed Flag will be turned ON. When the Data Write Completed Flag
turns ON, the Data Write Flag will turn OFF and the program will stop.
Note 1. If the enter command remains set, data will be repeatedly written to EEPROM. Therefore, set
the function code to “00” (both the register number and function code are 0000), which per-
forms no processing, to disable the enter command.
Note 2. If the sent data is faulty, word m bit 7 will be turned ON, which will turn ON the Faulty Data Flag
and the program will be stopped until the Faulty Data Reset Input Bit (000002) is turned ON.
7-23
S Ladder Program
000000 (Write Parameter Input Bit) 003010 000101
DIFU (013) MOV (021)
000001 #FF10
000001 000103 003010
003000 D00205
003000
MOV (021)
#00FD
000103
MOV (021) D00206
#0000
MOV (021)
0001
#0000
Sets enter command.
D00207
MOV ()21)
000001 #0001
0001 000102
BSET (071)
000100
BSET (071) #0000
#0000 Sets “00” function. D00205
D00200 D00207
D00209 000100
003001
ANDW (034)
000101
D00000
#FF00 000102
D00200
ORW (035) 003001

D00200 XFER (070)
#0010 #0002
D00205 D00205
n
ANDW (034)
D00000 MOVD (083)
#00FF D00207
D00201 #0010
n+2
ANDW (034)
D00001 (Continued on the next page.)
#FF00
D00202
ORW (035)
D00201
D00202
D00206
ANDW (034)
D00001
Sets write data.
#00FF
D00207
7-24
(From previous page.)
003001
CMP (020)
D00205
m
Equals Flag (P_EQ)
003002
ANDW (034)
m+1
#00FF
D00208
ANDW (034)
D00206
#00FF
D00209
CMP (020)
D00208
D00209
Equals Flag (P_EQ)
003003
003002 003003
003005
ASL (025)
0001
Word m bit 7 000002

003010
003010
MOV (021)
#0000
0001
Data error processing.
BSET (071)
#0000
D00205
D00207
XFER (070)
#0002
D00205
MOVD (083)
D00207
#0010
n+2
7-25
8
Chapter 8
Appendices
8-1 Specifications
8-2 Objects
8-3 DeviceNet Communications Response Time
Appendices Chapter 8
8-1 Specifications
Item Specifications
Model 3G3FV-PDRT1-SINV1
Remote I/O • Basic remote I/O: Allocated 2 input and 2 output words.
• Standard remote I/O (default setting): Allocated 2 input and 2 output
words.
• Special remote I/O: Allocated 3 input and 3 output words.
• Control remote I/O: Allocated 4 input and 4 output words.
Note 1. The user can select from among these four types of remote I/O.
Note 2. Basic and standard remote I/O are compatible with DeviceNet.
Special remote I/O and control remote I/O are applicable only
to this product and is not compatible with DeviceNet.
Explicit messages A maximum of 32 bytes of data can be sent or received.
Note Explicit messages are applicable to the AC/DC drive profile.
Communications power supply 11 to 25 VDC (20 mA max.)
specifications
Internal circuit power supply Provided from Inverter.
Operating location Indoors (with no corrosive gases, oil mist, metallic particles, etc.)
Operating ambient temperature –10 to 45°C
Operating ambient humidity 90% RH max. (with no condensation)
Storage temperature –20 to 60°C
Area 1,000 m max.
Weight 150 g max.
8-2
8-2 Objects
There are eight types of object:
• Identify objects (identification information): Class 01 hex
• Message router objects: Class 02 hex
• DeviceNet objects: Class 03 hex
• Assembly objects: Class 04 hex
• DeviceNet connection objects: Class 05 hex
• Motor data objects: Class 28
• Control supervisor objects: Class 29 hex
• AC/DC drive objects: Class 2A hex
For details on motor data objects, control supervisor objects, and AC/DC drive objects, refer to 5-5-6
Motor Data Objects: Class 28 Hex through 5-5-8 AC/DC Drive Objects: Class 2A Hex.
8-2-1 Identify Objects (Identification Information): Class 01 Hex

Identify objects are objects that provide DeviceNet product information. All of this information is read-
only.

05 Reset (return to initial status)
8-3
S Object Details
range (Hex)
Revision revisions. The revision
value is advanced
whenever there is a
change.
01 01 Vender ID Indicates the maker’s code. --- 002F Yes No Word
OMRON: 47 (2F hex)
02 Device Type Indicates the DeviceNet --- 0002 Yes No Word
profile classification. The
Inverter corresponds to the
AC/DC Drive.
• Master Unit: 0
• AC/DC Drive: 2
03 Product Code Assigned to each series by --- 0034 Yes No Word
each maker.
DeviceNet Communications
Card: 52 (34 hex) or 57 (39
hex) or 58 (34 hex)
04 Revision Indicates overall software --- 02.01 Yes No Byte × 2
revisions for the DeviceNet
05 Status Indicates the --- 0000 Yes No Word
communications status of
the DeviceNet
(See details below.)
06 Serial Number Indicates the product serial --- Depends Yes No Long
number of the DeviceNet on
Communications Card. product.
(60000000 hex onwards)
07 Product Number Indicates product model --- Number Yes No String
number. shown at
left.
3G3FV-PDRT1-SIN/3G3RV
–PDRT1-SIN/3G3PV-PDRT
1-SIN
08 State Indicates Inverter status. --- 03 Yes No Byte
• 3 hex: Inverter ready
D Status Details
Bit Item Content
0 Connection 0: Not connected.
1: Master/Slave connected.
1 Not used. ---
2 Configuration 0: Data never changed.
1: Data other than default.
3 to 15 Not used. ---
Note Bits that are not used are all zeros.
8-2-2 Message Router Objects: Class 02 Hex

Message router objects have the function of distributing DeviceNet communications data. Message
and remote I/O operations, and so on, must pass through these objects to be distributed. Message rout-
er objects themselves are involved in internal processing only and do not have data to be exchanged
externally.
8-4

S Object Details
range (Hex)
value is advanced
whenever there is a
change.
8-2-3 DeviceNet Objects: Class 03 Hex

DeviceNet objects are objects related to DeviceNet communications information and operations.

S Object Details
range (Hex)
value is advanced
whenever there is a
change.
01 01 MAC ID Indicates the set value of --- 00 Yes No Byte
the communications node
address. It is read-only
because the setting is
made by the external
setting switch.
02 Baud Rate Indicates the baud rate. It is --- 00 Yes No Byte
write-protected because the
setting is made by the
external setting switch.
00: 125 Kbps
01: 250 Kbps
02: 500 Kbps
05 Allocation Information Indicates DeviceNet --- 0000 Yes No Byte × 2
communications connection
information. Used to check
whether connection is
already made.
• See details below.
• Cannot be written for ex-
plicit messages. (Error is
returned.)
8-5
D Allocation Information Details
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1: Remote I/O 1: Explicit
connection message
status connection
status
1 0 0 Node address (MAC ID) of Master connected for DeviceNet communications.
Note The Master Unit automatically writes allocation information when the communications connec-
tion is completed. After the Master Unit has written the information, writing is prohibited.
8-2-4 Assembly Objects: Class 04 Hex

Assembly objects are objects related to remote I/O operations. Remote I/O operations are configured
with these objects for communications.

S Object Details
range (Hex)
value is advanced
whenever there is a
change.
14 03 Remote I/O data Operation is the same as See 00. 00. Yes Yes Byte × 4
for basic remote I/O note 1. 00. 00
(output).
for standard remote I/O note 1. 00. 00
(output).
46 03 Remote I/O data Operation is the same as --- 00. 00. Yes No Byte × 4
for basic remote I/O (input). 00. 00
for standard remote I/O 00. 00
(input).
for special remote I/O note 1. 00. 00.
(output). 00
for control remote I/O note 1. 00. 00.
(output). 00. 00.
00. 00.
for special remote I/O 00. 00.
(input). 00
for control remote I/O 00. 00.
(input). 00. 00.
00. 00.
Note 1. The setting ranges are the same as the respective remote I/O setting ranges.
8-6
Note 2. The remote I/O operations are the same as those explained in 5-1 Remote I/O and 5-3 Special
Remote I/O Operation.
Note 3. Remote I/O can be performed by means of message communications. When a normal re-
mote I/O communications connection is established, however, the message communications
cannot be used for that purpose. Even if an attempt is made to use message communications,
they will be overwritten by remote I/O inputs.
8-7
8-2-5 DeviceNet Connection Objects: Class 05 Hex

DeviceNet connection objects are objects related to information and operations involving DeviceNet
communications connections. The Master Unit uses the information and operations of these objects to
execute the initial processing for communications.

S Object Details
range (Hex)
value is advanced
whenever there is a
change.
01 01 State Indicates the status of this --- Must be Yes No Byte
Explicit object (instance). “03”
message when
00: Does not exist in
commu-
network, or is not ready.
nications
01: In network state, waiting
are es-
for connection event from
tab-
Master Unit.
lished.
02: Waiting for connection
ID (attribute) writing.
03: Connection completed.
04: Timeout
02 Instance type Indicates the type of object --- 00 Yes No Byte
(instance).
00: Explicit message
01: Remote I/O
03 Transport class trigger Indicates the --- 83 Yes No Byte
communications
configuration for the
Card.
04 Produced connection ID Indicates the label used for --- --- Yes No Word
the communications header
for the DeviceNet
C i ti
Communications C d
Card.
05 Consumed connection --- --- Yes No Word
ID Note: These are set when
the communications
connection is made.
06 Initial comm Indicates the --- 21 Yes No Byte
characteristics communications
Card.
07 Produced connection Indicates the maximum --- 0020 Yes No Word
size number of bytes for
transmission.
08 Consumed connection Indicates the maximum --- 0020 Yes No Word
reception.
8-8
range (Hex)
01 09 Expected packet rate Indicates the length of the 0 to 09C4 Yes Yes Word
Explicit internal processing timeout 65,535 (2,500
message when a communications (ms) ms)
request is received.
Incremented by 10-ms
units.
0C Watchdog time-out Indicates the action for --- 01 Yes No Byte
action internal processing timeout
related to communications.
00: Retain timeout status
(until reset or cleared).
01: Cut connection
automatically.
02: Operate again with
same connection as is.
0D Produced connection Indicates number of bytes --- 0000 Yes No Word
path length of data for produced
connection path. (No data
for explicit messages.)
0E Produced connection Indicates the data for --- --- Yes No Array
path defining the application
object for sending this
object (instance). (No data
0F Consumed connection Indicates the number of --- 0000 Yes No Word
path length bytes of data for the
consumed connection path.
(No data for explicit
messages.)
10 Consumed connection Indicates the data for --- --- Yes No Array
object for receiving this
object (instance). (No data
8-9
range (Hex)
02 01 State Indicates the status of this --- Must be Yes No Byte
Remote object (instance). “03”
I/O when
00: Does not exist in
commu-
network, or is not ready.
nications
01: In network state, waiting
are es-
for connection event from
tab-
Master Unit.
lished.
02: Waiting for connection
ID (attribute) writing.
03: Connection completed.
04: Timeout
02 Instance type Indicates the type of object --- 01 Yes No Byte
(instance).
00: Explicit message
01: Remote I/O
03 Transport class trigger Indicates the --- 82 Yes No Byte
communications
Card.
04 Produced connection ID Indicates the label used for --- --- Yes No Word
the communications header
for the DeviceNet
C
Communications
i ti Card.
C d
05 Consumed connection --- --- Yes No Word
ID Note: These are set when
the communications
connection is made.
06 Initial comm Indicates the --- 01 Yes No Byte
characteristics communications
Card.
8-10
range (Hex)
02 07 Produced connection Indicates the maximum --- 0004 Yes No Word
Remote size number of bytes for
I/O transmission.
08 Consumed connection Indicates the maximum --- 0004 Yes No Word
reception.
09 Expected packet rate Indicates the length of the 0 to 0000 Yes Yes Word
internal processing timeout 65,535 (0 ms)
when a communications (ms)
request is received.
0C Watchdog time-out Indicates the action for --- 01 Yes No Byte
action internal processing timeout
related to communications.
00: Retain timeout status
(until reset or cleared).
01: Cut connection
automatically.
02: Operate again with
same connection as is.
0D Produced connection Indicates number of bytes --- 0003 Yes No Word
path length of data for produced
connection path.
0E Produced connection Indicates the data for --- 62 34 37 Yes No Array
object for sending this
object (instance).
Note: Has a function for
switching the DeviceNet
Communication Card’s
remote I/O operation.
0F Consumed connection Indicates the number of --- 0003 Yes No Word
path length bytes of data for the
consumed connection path.
10 Consumed connection Indicates the data for --- 62 31 35 Yes No Array
object for receiving this
object (instance).
Note: Has a function for
switching the DeviceNet
Communication Card’s
remote I/O operation.
Note “Reception” means output (Inverter to SYSMAC PC), and “transmission” means input (SYSMAC
PC to Inverter).
8-11
8-3 DeviceNet Communications Response Time

This section describes communications response time when OMRON Master and Slave Units are be-
ing used. Use this section for reference when planning I/O timing. The equations provided here are valid
under the following conditions:
• The Master Unit is operating with the scan list enabled.
• All of the required Slaves are participating in communications.
• No errors are being indicated at the Master Unit
• Messages are not being produced in the network (from another company’s configurator, for example).
S Communications Cycle Time
D One Master in Network

The following equations show the communications cycle time (TRM) when there is only one Master in
the network. If the calculation result is less than 2 ms, the communications cycle time (TRM) will be con-
sidered as 2 ms.
TRM = Σ Communications time for 1 Slave
+ High-density Unit processing time
+ Explicit message processing time
+ COS/Cyclic connection communications time
+ 0.01 × N + 1.0
Note N = Number of Slaves.

Communications Time for 1 Slave
This is the time required for 1 Slave to perform communications. “Σ Communications time for 1 Slave” in
the above equation represents the sum of the communications times for each Slave in the network. The
equations used to calculate the communications time (TRS) for different types of Slave are given below.
Output Slaves with 8 or Less Bytes of Output
TRT = 0.016 × TB × SOUT1 + 0.11 × TB + 0.07
SOUT1 : The number of Output Slave output words
TB : The baud rate factor
(500 kbps: TB = 2; 250 kbps: TB = 4; 125 kbps: TB = 8)
Input Slaves with 8 or Less Bytes of Input
TRT = 0.016 × TB × SIN1 + 0.06 × TB + 0.05
SIN1 : The number of Input Slave input words
Mixed I/O Slaves with 8 or Less Bytes of Both Input and Output
TRT = 0.016 × TB × (SOUT2 +SIN2) + 0.11 × TB + 0.07
SOUT2 : The number of Mixed I/O Slave output words
SIN2 : The number of Mixed I/O Slave input words
8-12
Slaves with More than 8 Bytes of Input or Output (or Both)
TRT = TOH × TBYTE-IN × BIN × TBYTE-OUT × BOUT
TOH : Protocol overhead
TBYTE-IN : Input byte transmission time
BIN : Number of input bytes
TBYTE-OUT : Output byte transmission time
BOUT : Number of output bytes
Baud rate TOH TBYTE-IN TBYTE-OUT
500 kbps 0.306 ms 0.040 ms 0.036 ms
250 kbps 0.542 ms 0.073 ms 0.069 ms
125 kbps 1.014 ms 0.139 ms 0.135 ms
Note Calculate with BOUT = 0 for Slaves with inputs only and BIN = 0 for Slaves with outputs only.
High-density Unit Processing Time
Add 3.5 ms if there is at least 1 Slave with more than 8 bytes of input or output (or both).
Explicit Message Processing Time
Add the following explicit message processing time when performing explicit message communications
(sending or receiving).
Explicit message processing time = 0.11 × TB n
n : The number of explicit messages that are sent or received within 1 cycle of the CPU Unit
COS/Cyclic Connection Communications Time
Add the following COS/cyclic connection communications time.
COS/cyclic connection communications time = (0.05 + 0.008 × S) × TB × n
S : The total number of input and output bytes for COS/cycle connections
n : The number of nodes for which COS/cyclic connections occur within 1 cycle of the CPU
Unit
D More than One Master in Network

Calculate the communications cycle time according to the above equation for the Slaves of each Master
Unit. The communications cycle time for the entire network is the sum of communications cycle times
for each Master Unit.
8-13
S I/O Response Time of Inverter

The following shows processing time between the Inverter and the DeviceNet Communications Card.
• DP-RAM processing time between the Inverter and DeviceNet Communications Card: 5 ms
• Inverter input scanning: 5 ms (read twice)
• Inverter output scanning: 5 ms
• Inverter parameters scanning: 20 ms
Inverter I/O response time
Ladder program cycle time
Communications cycle time
DP-RAM processing time: 5 ms
Inverter I/O scanning 15 ms 5 ms
Inverter internal processing
Maximum input response Maximum output response
Note 1. The internal processing time varies depending on the controls to be executed.
Note 2. Input scanning for parameter reading or writing requires 20 ms.
8-14
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. I525-E1-02
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision Date Revised content

code
01 June 1998 Original production
02 September 2001 The following changes were made throughout the manual: Information related to 3G3RV and 3G3PV
Inverters was added (and specific model numbers changed to “Inverter”); “V1” was added to the model
number; “CompoBus/D” was removed or changed to “DeviceNet” where appropriate; “CS1 Series” was
changed to “CS Series” or “CS/CJ Series” where appropriate; information related to CS/CJ-series Devi-
ceNet Units and CJ-series PCs was added; and IOWR changed to CMND where applicable.
In addition, the following changes were made.
Preliminary Pages: The order of the preliminary pages was changed and precautionary information
was added.
Page 1-2: “6” changed to “8” in last paragraph under “Easy Communications.”
Page 1-4: Last sentence removed from first paragraph. Information on new functions added.
Page 1-7: Wording of first paragraph changed.
Page 1-8: Changes made to first paragraph under “Configurator Review.”
Page 1-9: Information added to table.
Page 2-3: Last paragraph removed.
Pages 2-12, 5-7, 5-27, : Note added.
Page 2-17: Precaution added.
Page 3-5: Changes made to precautionary information. First step of mounting procedure changed.
Page 4-2: Information on free allocation added.
Page 4-3: Information on scan lists changed in several places.
Page 4-5: Minor change made to last paragraph.
Page 4-6: Information on procedures for word allocation added.
Page 4-7: Changes made to information on verification error. Minor changes made to allocation
example. Changes made to procedure in several places.
Page 4-9: First paragraph changed. Minor change made to table. Note changed.
Page 4-10: Information on allocation restrictions added.
Page 4-11: Note changed. Changes made to procedure in several places.
Chapter 5: Order changed and information on control remote I/O added in several places. In addi-
tion, the following changes were made.
Page 5-2: Changes made to precautionary information.
Page 5-3: Minor change made to captions.
Page 5-4: Last note removed.
Page 5-5: Note 3 removed and number of poles corrected in notes.
Page 5-24: Information on switching remote I/O operation changed in several places.
Page 5-30: Information on reading and writing parameters added, and graphic corrected.
Page 6-7: Catalog number corrected.
Chapter 7: Extensive changes made throughout the chapter to provide examples for CS-series PCs.
Page 8-2: Minor changes made to table and “three” changed to “four.”
Page 8-6: Information added to table.
Page 8-11: Equations added.
R-1
OMRON Corporation
FA Systems Division H.Q.
66 Matsumoto
Mishima-city, Shizuoka 411-8511
Japan
Tel: (81)559-77-9181/Fax: (81)559-77-9045
Authorized Distributor:
Cat. No. I525-E1-02 Note: Specifications subject to change without notice. 1604700-1B Printed in Japan

User'S Manual: Model 3G3Fv-Pdrt1-Sinv1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User'S Manual: Model 3G3Fv-Pdrt1-Sinv1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

User'S Manual: Model 3G3Fv-Pdrt1-Sinv1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cat. No.

! WARNING Wiring, maintenance, or inspection must be performed by authorized personnel. Not

S Locations subject to direct sunlight.

S Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.

Items to Check Before Unpacking

OMRON Product References

Chapter 1. Functions and System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2. DeviceNet Communications Line Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3. Setup and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4. DeviceNet System Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5. DeviceNet Communications Card Operations . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6. Communications Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 7. Communications Programs (SYSMAC CS-series PCs) . .

Functions and System

S Communications with SYSMAC CS/CJ-series, C200HX/HG/HE, and

S Choice of Communications Functions

S Applicable to Various System Configurations

Remote I/O function

Forward Stop Power supply

1-2 New Functions

S New Remote I/O Function

S Changes to Remote I/O Switching Methods

S Parameter Reading and Writing Using Explicit Messages

S New Communications Power Supply Interrupt Detection Function

S 3G3RV Special Remote I/O Supported from Version VSF105091

1-3 DeviceNet Features

S System Configuration Example

OMRON Slaves OMRON Slaves

Slaves by other company

Slaves by other company Slaves by other company

S Simultaneous Remote I/O and Message Services

S Connect Multiple PCs to the Same Network

S Handle Multi-point Control and Line Expansions with Multi-layer

S Free Remote I/O Allocation

S Handle Slaves with Different Response Speeds

S Easily Expand or Change Lines with Various Connection Methods

1-4 DeviceNet System Configuration

1-4-1 System Configuration

S Fixed Allocation: Configuration without a Configurator

CS/CJ-series PCs: 64 nodes max. (including the Master Unit)

S Free Allocation: Configuration with a Configurator

SYSDRIVE 3G3RV/3G3PV/3G3FV Inverter

64 nodes max. (including the Master Unit)

Slave Slave Slave

64 nodes max. (including the Master Unit)

1-4-2 Configurator Overview

DeviceNet No accessories Dedicated ISA Board Dedicated PCMCIA Card

1-4-3 DeviceNet Communications Specifications

S CS1W-DRM21 or CJ1W-DRM21 Master Units

D Communications without Configurator: Fixed Allocations

D Communications with Configurator: Free Allocations

Applicable PC CS Series CJ Series

S C200HW-DRM21-V1 or CVM1-DRM21-V1 Master Units

D Communications without Configurator: Fixed Allocation

D Communications with Configurator: Free Allocation

Applicable PC CV Series CS Series/ C200HS

2-1 Network Configuration Overview

Node Node Node M Node Drop line

DeviceNet cables (5-wire cables) are